Sony RDR-HXD790 User Guide Manual Operating Instruction Pdf

Sony RDR-HXD790 User Guide Manual Operating Instruction Pdf
3-295-080-12(1)
DVD Recorder
Operating Instructions
To find out useful hints, tips and information about Sony products and
services please visit: www.sony-europe.com/myproduct
RDR-HXD790/HXD890/HXD990/HXD1090
RDR-HXD795/HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095
© 2008 Sony
Downloaded
FromCorporation
DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
WARNING
To reduce the risk of fire or
electric shock, do not expose this
apparatus to rain or moisture.
To avoid electrical shock, do not
open the cabinet. Refer servicing
to qualified personnel only.
The mains lead must be changed
only at a qualified service shop.
Batteries or batteries installed
apparatus shall not be exposed to
excessive heat such as sunshine,
fire or the like.
Notice for customers in the
United Kingdom and
Republic of Ireland
A molded plug complying with
BS1363 is fitted to this equipment
for your safety and convenience.
Should the fuse in the plug
supplied need to be replaced, a 5
AMP fuse approved by ASTA or
BSI to BS1362, (i.e., marked with
or
mark) must be used.
If the plug supplied with this
equipment has a detachable fuse
cover, be sure to attach the fuse
cover after you change the fuse.
Never use the plug without the
fuse cover. If you should lose the
fuse cover, please contact your
nearest Sony service station.
Precautions
This appliance is classified as a
CLASS 1 LASER product. The
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
MARKING is located on the rear
of the unit.
CAUTION
The use of optical instruments
with this product will increase eye
hazard. As the laser beam used in
this DVD recorder is harmful to
eyes, do not attempt to
disassemble the cabinet.
Refer servicing to qualified
personnel only.
• This unit operates on 220 –
240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Check that
the unit’s operating voltage is
identical with your local power
supply.
• To prevent fire or shock hazard,
do not place objects filled with
liquids, such as vases, on the
apparatus.
• Install this system so that the
mains lead can be unplugged
from the wall socket
immediately in the event of
trouble.
This label is located on the laser
protective housing inside the
enclosure.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
2
GUIDE Plus+ and G-LINK are (1)
registered trademarks or
trademarks of, (2) manufactured
under license from and (3) subject
of various international patents
and patent applications owned by,
or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide
International, Inc. and/or its
related affiliates.
GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE
INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/
OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES
ARE NOT IN ANY WAY
LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY
OF THE PROGRAM
SCHEDULE INFORMATION
PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE
PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO
EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV
GUIDE INTERNATIONAL,
INC. AND /OR ITS RELATED
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR
ANY AMOUNTS
REPRESENTING LOSS OF
PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
PROVISION OR USE OF ANY
INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT,
OR SERVICES RELATING TO
THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.
Disposal of Old Electrical
& Electronic Equipment
(Applicable in the
European Union and
other European
countries with separate
collection systems)
This symbol on the product or on
its packaging indicates that this
product shall not be treated as
household waste. Instead it shall
be handed over to the applicable
collection point for the recycling
of electrical and electronic
equipment. By ensuring this
product is disposed of correctly,
you will help prevent potential
negative consequences for the
environment and human health,
which could otherwise be caused
by inappropriate waste handling
of this product. The recycling of
materials will help to conserve
natural resources. For more
detailed information about
recycling of this product, please
contact your local Civic Office,
your household waste disposal
service or the shop where you
purchased the product.
Disposal of waste
batteries (applicable in
the European Union and
other European
countries with separate
collection systems)
The manufacturer of this
product is Sony Corporation,
1-7-1 Konan Minato-ku
Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan. The
Authorized Representative
for EMC and product safety
is Sony Deutschland GmbH,
Hedelfinger Strasse 61,
70327 Stuttgart, Germany.
For any service or guarantee
matters please refer to the
addresses given in separate
service or guarantee
documents.
This symbol on the battery or on
the packaging indicates that the
battery provided with this product
shall not be treated as household
waste.
By ensuring these batteries are
disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent potentially negative
consequences for the environment
and human health which could
otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of
the battery. The recycling of the
materials will help to conserve
natural resources.
In case of products that for safety,
performance or data integrity
reasons require a permanent
connection with an incorporated
battery, this battery should be
replaced by qualified service staff
only.
To ensure that the battery will be
treated properly, hand over the
product at end-of-life to the
applicable collection point for the
recycling of electrical and
electronic equipment.
For all other batteries, please view
the section on how to remove the
battery from the product safely.
Hand the battery over to the
applicable collection point for the
recycling of waste batteries.
For more detailed information
about recycling of this product or
battery, please contact your local
Civic Office, your household
waste disposal service or the shop
where you purchased the product.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
3
Precautions
This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the
limits set out in the EMC
Directive using a connection
cable shorter than 3 metres.
On safety
Should any solid object or
liquid fall into the cabinet,
unplug the recorder and have it
checked by qualified personnel
before operating it any further.
About the hard disk drive
The hard disk has a high storage
density, which enables long
recording durations and quick
access to the written data.
However, it can easily be
damaged by shock, vibration or
dust, and should be kept away
from magnets. To avoid losing
important data, observe the
following precautions.
• Do not apply a strong shock to
the recorder.
• Do not place the recorder in a
location subject to mechanical
vibrations or in an unstable
location.
• Do not place the recorder on
top of a hot surface, such as a
VCR or amplifier (receiver).
• Do not use the recorder in a
place subject to extreme
changes in temperature
(temperature gradient less
than 10 °C/hour).
• Do not move the recorder
with its mains lead connected.
• Do not disconnect the mains
lead while the power is on.
• When disconnecting the
mains lead, turn off the power
and make sure that the hard
disk drive is not operating (the
clock is displayed in the front
panel display for at least
30 seconds and all recording
or dubbing has stopped).
• Do not move the recorder for
one minute after you have
unplugged the mains lead.
• Do not attempt to replace or
upgrade the hard disk by
yourself, as this may result in
malfunction.
If the hard disk drive should
malfunction, you cannot
recover lost data. The hard disk
drive is only a temporary
storage space.
About repairing the hard
disk drive
• The contents of the hard disk
drive may be checked in case
of repair or inspection during
a malfunction or
modification. However, the
contents will not be backed up
or saved by Sony.
• If the hard disk needs to be
formatted or replaced, it will
be done at the discretion of
Sony. All contents of the hard
disk drive will be erased,
including contents that violate
copyright laws.
On power sources
• The recorder is not
disconnected from the AC
power source (mains) as long
as it is connected to the wall
outlet, even if the recorder
itself has been turned off.
• If you are not going to use the
recorder for a long time, be
sure to disconnect the
recorder from the wall outlet.
To disconnect the AC power
cord (mains lead), grasp the
plug itself; never pull the
cord.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
4
On placement
• Place the recorder in a location
with adequate ventilation to
prevent heat build-up in the
recorder.
• Do not place the recorder on a
soft surface such as a rug that
might block the ventilation
holes.
• Do not place the recorder in a
confined space such as a
bookshelf or similar unit.
• Do not place the recorder in a
location near heat sources, or
in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust, or
mechanical shock.
• Do not place the recorder in
an inclined position. It is
designed to be operated in a
horizontal position only.
• Keep the recorder and discs
away from equipment with
strong magnets, such as
microwave ovens, or large
loudspeakers.
• Do not place heavy objects on
the recorder.
On recording
Make trial recordings before
making the actual recording.
On compensation for lost
recordings
Sony is not liable and will not
compensate for any lost
recordings or relevant losses,
including when recordings are
not made due to reasons
including recorder failure, or
when the contents of a
recording are lost or damaged as
a result of recorder failure or
repair undertaken to the
recorder. Sony will not restore,
recover, or replicate the
recorded contents under any
circumstances.
Copyrights
• Television programmes,
films, video tapes, discs, and
other materials may be
copyrighted. Unauthorized
recording of such material
may be contrary to the
provisions of the copyright
laws. Also, use of this
recorder with cable television
transmission may require
authorization from the cable
television transmitter and/or
programme owner.
• This product incorporates
copyright protection
technology that is protected
by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright
protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision,
and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses
only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
• This Product includes
FontAvenue® fonts licenced
by NEC corporation.
FontAvenue is a registered
trademark of NEC
corporation.
• “ ” and x-Application are
trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
About this manual
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Caution: This recorder is
capable of holding a still
video image or on-screen
display image on your
television screen
indefinitely. If you leave the
still video image or onscreen display image
displayed on your TV for an
extended period of time you
risk permanent damage to
your television screen.
Plasma display panels and
projection televisions are
especially susceptible to this.
If you have any questions or
problems concerning your
recorder, please consult your
nearest Sony dealer.
Copy guard function
Since the recorder has a copy
guard function, programmes
received through an external
tuner (not supplied) may
contain copy protection signals
(copy guard function) and as
such may not be recordable,
depending on the type of signal.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
Check your model name
The instructions in this
manual are for 8 models:
RDR-HXD790, RDRHXD795, RDR-HXD890,
RDR-HXD895, RDRHXD990, RDR-HXD995,
RDR-HXD1090, and RDRHXD1095. Check your
model name by looking at
the front panel of the
recorder.
• In this manual, the internal
hard disk drive is written as
“HDD,” and “disc” is used as
a general reference for the
HDD, DVDs, or CDs unless
otherwise specified by the text
or illustrations.
• Icons, such as DVD , listed
at the top of each explanation
indicate what kind of media
can be used with the function
being explained. For details,
see “Recordable and Playable
Discs” on page 151.
• Instructions in this manual
describe the controls on the
remote. You can also use the
controls on the recorder if
they have the same or similar
names as those on the remote.
• The on-screen display
illustrations used in this
manual may not match the
graphics displayed on your
TV screen.
• RDR-HXD795/HXD895/
HXD995/HXD1095 is used
for illustration purposes.
• The explanations regarding
DVDs in this manual refer to
DVDs created on this
recorder. The explanations do
not apply to DVDs that are
created on other recorders and
played back on this recorder.
5
Table of Contents
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Guide to Parts and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Hookups and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Hooking Up the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Checking hookup and setting methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box Controller . . . . . . . 18
A: Receiving Freeview (For digital broadcasting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
B: Receiving Freeview and analogue terrestrial broadcastings . . . . . . 19
C: Receiving cable or satellite (For analogue broadcasting). . . . . . . . . 20
D: Receiving terrestrial (For analogue broadcasting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
About the SMARTLINK features (for SCART connections only). . . . . . 24
About the “Control for HDMI” functions for ‘BRAVIA’ Sync
(for HDMI connections only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Step 4: Inserting a Conditional Access Module (CAM)
(RDR-HXD795/HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Step 5: Connecting the Mains Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Step 6: Preparing the Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Controlling TVs with the remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD
recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Changing programme positions of the recorder using the remote . . . . 29
Step 7: Easy Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system (For analogue broadcasting/
in areas with GUIDE Plus+ only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting to the LINE 1/DECODER jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting an External Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Connecting a decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Setting external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder)
programme positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
6
Seven Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
1. Inserting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2. Recording a Programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Checking the disc status while recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3. Playing the Recorded Programme (Title List) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Displaying the playing time and play information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4. Changing the Name of a Recorded Programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5. Labelling and Protecting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Labelling a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Protecting a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6. Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment (Finalise) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Unfinalising a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7. Reformatting a Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
For Freeview
Guide to Digital Services (For Freeview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Viewing the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Programme Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Displaying the programme information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Viewing Teletext (not available in some areas). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Viewing a Digital Text Service (models for the UK only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Selecting digital text from dedicated digital teletext channels . . . . . . . . 52
Selecting digital text from other channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Recording (For Freeview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Timer Recording (EPG/Series/Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Recording TV programmes using the EPG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Recording programmes using Series Recording
(models for the UK only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Setting the timer manually (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using the Quick Timer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Creating chapters in a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings (Timer List) . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Recording from Connected Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
7
For analogue broadcasting
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting/in areas with
GUIDE Plus+ only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Viewing the GUIDE Plus+ Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Listing Up Your Favourite Programme Information (My TV) . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Making Changes to the GUIDE Plus+ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host channel (Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host channel manually (Setup). . . . . . . . . 64
Checking programme positions (Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Disabling programme positions (Editor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Recording (For analogue broadcasting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Timer Recording (GUIDE Plus+/Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+ (in areas with GUIDE Plus+
service only)). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting the timer manually (Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the Quick Timer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Recording stereo and bilingual programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Creating chapters in a title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer Settings (Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Checking/changing timer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cancelling timer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Recording from Connected Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Playing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Playing a specific portion repeatedly (A-B Repeat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Playing repeatedly (Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Creating your own programme (Programme) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Advanced Playback Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Pausing a TV broadcast (TV Pause/Pause Live TV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Playing from the beginning of the programme you are recording
(Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Playing a previous recording while making another
(Simultaneous Rec and Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Searching for a Time/Title/Chapter/Track, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
8
Erasing and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Before Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Erasing and Editing a Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Editing multiple titles (Multi-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Erasing a section of a title (A-B Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Dividing a title (Divide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Erasing and Editing a Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Dividing a chapter (Divide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Erasing a chapter (Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Combining multiple chapters (Combine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Creating and Editing a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Moving a Playlist title (Move) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Combining multiple Playlist titles (Combine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Dividing a Playlist title (Divide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Moving a chapter (Move) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Dubbing (HDD y DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Before Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
HDD/DVD Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Dubbing Using Dubbing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Making a Backup Disc (DVD Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HDD Camcorder Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Before HDD Camcorder Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Preparing for HDD camcorder dubbing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
One-Touch Dubbing from HDD Camcorder (ONE-TOUCH DUB) . . . . . . . 96
Dubbing from HDD Camcorder Using the On-Screen Display
(HDD-Cam Dubbing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
DV Camcorder Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Before DV Camcorder Dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Dubbing an Entire DV Format Tape (DV One-Touch Dubbing) . . . . . . . . 100
Dubbing Selected Scenes (DV Manual Dubbing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Playing from a DV Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
9
Music Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
About Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Preparing for Using Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Connecting the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Copying tracks or albums (USB t HDD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Copying audio tracks (DISC t HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Copying tracks or albums on the HDD (HDD y HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Playing Audio Tracks Using Jukebox/USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Adding audio tracks to a Playlist (HDD only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Playback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Playing repeatedly (Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Creating your own programme (Programme) (USB device only) . . . . 106
Managing Audio Tracks on the Music Jukebox (HDD only) . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Photo Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
About the “Photo Album” Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Preparing for Using the “Photo Album” Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Connecting the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Copying JPEG image files to the HDD (DISC/USB t HDD) . . . . . . . 108
Copying all JPEG image files from the connected USB device
(USB t DVD-RW/DVD-R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Copying JPEG image files or albums on the HDD
(HDD y HDD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Copying JPEG image albums to a disc
(HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Copying JPEG image files to a disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R) . . . . 111
Using the “Photo Album” List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Playing a slideshow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Creating a Slideshow with Your Favourite Music and Graphic Effects
(x-Pict Story) (HDD only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Managing JPEG Image Files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Printing JPEG Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
10
Settings and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adjusting Picture Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Using the Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Disc Settings (Disc Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Recorder Settings (Basic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Aerial Reception Settings (Digital Tuner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Aerial Reception Settings (Analog Tuner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Video Settings (Video In/Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Audio Input Settings (Audio In) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Audio Output Settings (Audio Out) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Language Settings (Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Recording Settings (Recording) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Playback Settings (Playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Limitation Settings (Parental Lock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
HDMI Settings (HDMI Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Other Settings (Options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Other Settings (Options 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Resetting the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Recordable and Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Playable Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
About Recording/Dubbing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Language Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Country/Area Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Notes About This Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Notes on MP3 Audio Tracks, JPEG Image Files, DivX Video Files,
and i.Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
11
Guide to Parts and Controls
For more information, see the pages in parentheses.
Remote
G AUDIO (75)
The AUDIO button has a tactile dot*.
H CLEAR (44, 77, 78)
I ANGLE (75, 114)
Changes the angles or rotates an image
during slideshow.
J TV/DVD (28)
Switches between TV mode and DVD
mode.
K SUBTITLE (75)
Selects a subtitle language.
L
(text) (51, 52)
This button function is not available in
some areas.
M MENU (73)
Displays the disc’s menu.
N Green (50, 61)
O Yellow (50, 61)
P Red (50, 61)
Q Blue (50, 61)
R SYSTEM MENU (120)
TITLE LIST (40, 73, 83)
A HDD (38)
Records to or plays titles on HDD.
DVD (38)
Records to or plays titles on DVD.
B [/1 (on/standby) (30)
Turns the recorder on or off.
C Z (open/close) (38)
Opens or closes the disc tray.
D PROG (programme) +/– (38)
The + button has a tactile dot*.
E Number buttons (80)
The number 5 button has a tactile dot*.
F INPUT (input select) (60, 72)
TOP MENU (73)
GUIDE (50, 61)
Displays EPG or GUIDE Plus+® system
screen.
S TIMER (56, 59)
T INFO (information) (50, 62)
Displays the programme information.
U </M/m/,/ENTER (30)
Selects a desired item.
V O RETURN (30)
EXIT (126)
Cancels scanning of programme
positions.
Selects an input source.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
12
W DISPLAY (43)
Displays the playing status or disc
information.
X ./> (previous/next) (75,
105)
PAGE +/– (50, 62)
Changes the programme list by page.
/
(instant replay/instant
advance) (75)
mc / CM (search/
slow/freeze frame) (75, 105)
DAY +/– (62)
Changes the programme list by day.
H (play) (73, 114)
X (pause) (39, 75, 105, 114)
x (stop) (73, 104, 114)
The H button has a tactile dot*.
Y TV PAUSE (79)
Z z REC (38)
x REC STOP (38)
HDD/DVD DUB (90)
Starts dubbing the current playing title
or cancels the dubbing.
REC MODE (38)
Selects the recording mode.
wj ZOOM (114)
Zooms an image during a slideshow.
wk TV [/1 (on/standby) (28)
TV t (input select) (28)
TV 2 (volume) +/– (28)
TV PROG (programme) +/– (28)
The + button has a tactile dot*.
wl PLAY MODE (77, 80)
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating
the recorder.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
13
Front panel
A [/1 (on/standby) (30)
Turns the recorder on or off.
B
(remote sensor) (27)
C Disc tray (38)
D Front panel display (15)
O CAM (Conditional Access
Module) slot (RDR-HXD795/
HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095 only)
(26)
P ONE-TOUCH DUB (96, 100)
Starts dubbing from a connected digital
video camera.
E Z (open/close) (38)
Opens or closes the disc tray.
F N (play) (73, 114)
The N button has a tactile dot*.
G x (stop) (73, 104, 114)
H z REC (38)
I HDD (38)
Records to or plays titles on HDD. The
HDD indicator lights up when the HDD
is selected.
DVD (38)
Records to or plays titles on DVD. The
DVD indicator lights up when the DVD
is selected.
J x REC STOP (38)
K PROGRAM +/– (38)
The + button has a tactile dot*.
L INPUT (input select) (60, 72)
Selects an input source.
M LINE 2 IN (S VIDEO/VIDEO/
L(MONO) AUDIO R) jacks (35)
Connect a VCR or similar recording
device to these jacks.
Q
DV IN jack (98)
Connect a DV camcorder to this jack.
R
USB jack (type A) (102, 108)
Connect a USB device to this jack.
S PictBridge USB jack (type B)
(118)
Connect a PictBridge-compatible
printer to this jack.
* Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating
the recorder.
To lock the recorder (Child Lock)
You can lock all of the buttons on the
recorder so that the settings are not cancelled
by mistake.
When the recorder is turned off, hold down
x (stop) on the recorder until “LOCKED”
appears in the front panel display. The
recorder does not work except for timer
recordings while the Child Lock is set.
To unlock the recorder, hold down x (stop)
on the recorder until “UNLOCKED”
appears in the front panel display.
N Z (eject) (RDR-HXD795/
HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095 only)
(26)
Removes the CAM from the CAM slot.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
14
Front panel display
A Displays the following:
• Playing time
• Current title/chapter/track/index
number
• Recording time/recording mode
• Clock
• Programme position
• EPG indication (61)
“EPG” appears when receiving the
GUIDE Plus+ data.
• TV Direct Rec. indication (38)
“TV” appears in the right most two
digits.
• UPDATE indication
“UPDATE” appears when the
recorder is updating the EPG
information.
D Timer indicator (66)
Lights up when the timer for recording
is set.
E Disc type
Lights up when a recordable DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc is loaded.
F Command Mode indicator (141)
Displays the Command Mode of the
remote.
When the Command Mode for the
recorder is set to “3 (Default setting),”
either “1” or “2” does not appear.
G Recording status
H Dubbing direction indicator
I Playing status
B NTSC indicator (125, 131)
Lights up when NTSC colour system is
selected.
C VPS/PDC indicator (57, 69)
Lights up when the VPS/PDC function
is turned on.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
15
Rear panel
A ANALOG AERIAL IN/OUT jacks
(18)
B LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L/VIDEO)
jacks (22, 25)
F HDMI OUT (high-definition
multimedia interface out) jack
(22, 25)
C LINE 1/DECODER jack (34)
G DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack
(25)
D G-LINK jack (20)
H AC IN terminal (27)
Connect the set top box controller to this
jack.
E DIGITAL AERIAL IN/OUT jacks
(18)
I LINE 3 – TV jack (22)
J LINE 2 OUT (S VIDEO) jack (22)
K COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) jacks (22)
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
16
Hookups and Settings
Hooking Up the Recorder
b Notes
•
•
•
•
•
See “Specifications” (page 162) for a list of supplied accessories.
Plug in cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.
You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not have a SCART or video input jack.
Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each component before connecting.
Hookups and Settings
Follow steps 1 through 7 to hook up and adjust the settings of the recorder. Do not connect
the mains lead until you reach “Step 5: Connecting the Mains Lead” on page 27.
Checking hookup and setting methods
The recorder incorporates both analogue and digital tuners. The programme guide and timer
recording method differ depending on which one you select. Depending on the broadcasts you
are receiving and your equipment, select one of the following aerial hookups. Do NOT set
“LINE 1 In” to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 131) when making connection C.
When you receive
Hookup
Programme guide
Timer recording using
programme guide
Freeview
A (page 18)
Digital Service
(page 50)
See page 53.
Both Freeview and
analogue terrestrial
broadcasting
B (page 19)
Select Digital Service or See page 53 when using
GUIDE Plus+ (page 30). Digital Service.
See page 66 when using
GUIDE Plus+.
Satellite, Cable
C (page 20)
GUIDE Plus+ (page 61) See page 66.
Terrestrial
D (page 21)
GUIDE Plus+ (page 61) See page 66.
b Note
Analogue broadcasts are scheduled to end at different times, depending on the country/area.
After analogue broadcasts end in your area, you will not be able to use hookup D to view TV broadcasts.
At that time, change to hookup A to view digital broadcasts.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
17
Step 1: Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box
Controller
b Notes
• If your aerial is a flat cable (300-ohm twin lead cable), use an external aerial connector (not supplied) to
connect the aerial to the recorder.
• If you have separate cables for AERIAL antennas, use an AERIAL UHF/VHF band mixer (not supplied)
to connect the aerial to the recorder.
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected
set top box receiver.
A: Receiving Freeview (For digital broadcasting)
Use this hookup if you can receive Freeview.
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme
position on the recorder.
TV
Wall
to aerial input
Aerial cable (supplied)
to DIGITAL AERIAL IN
: Signal flow
to DIGITAL AERIAL OUT
DVD recorder
1
Disconnect the aerial cable from your TV, and connect it to DIGITAL AERIAL IN on
the rear panel of the recorder.
2
Connect DIGITAL AERIAL OUT of the recorder to the aerial input of your TV using the
supplied aerial cable.
z Hint
For RDR-HXD795/HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095 (except models for the UK) only
When connecting to an indoor aerial, use one with a signal amplifier rated at 5 V, 30 mA. Then set “Aerial
Power” to “On” in the “Digital Tuner” setup (page 127).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
18
B: Receiving Freeview and analogue terrestrial broadcastings
Wall
TV
to aerial input
Hookups and Settings
This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for terrestrial digital and terrestrial analogue TV
broadcasts. Use this hookup if you want to view both Freeview and analogue terrestrial
broadcastings.
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme
position on the recorder.
Aerial cable (long, supplied)
to ANALOG
AERIAL IN
to DIGITAL
AERIAL IN
Aerial cable
(short, supplied)*
to DIGITAL
AERIAL OUT
to ANALOG
AERIAL OUT
DVD recorder
: Signal flow
* Aerial cable is supplied for some models.
1
Disconnect the aerial cable from your TV, and connect it to the DIGITAL AERIAL IN
jack on the rear panel of the recorder.
2
Connect the DIGITAL AERIAL OUT jack and the ANALOG AERIAL IN jack using the
supplied short aerial cable.
3
Connect the ANALOG AERIAL OUT jack of the recorder to the aerial input of your TV
using the supplied long aerial cable.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
19
C: Receiving cable or satellite (For analogue broadcasting)
With this hookup, you can record any programme position on the set top box receiver.
To watch cable programmes, you need to match the programme position on the recorder to
the aerial output programme position on the set top box receiver.
Place the set top box controller
near the remote sensor on the
set top box receiver.
Wall
Set top box
receiver
Set top box
controller
(page 21)
ANT IN
SCART cord*2
(not supplied)
TO TV
Aerial cable*1
(not supplied)
to ANALOG
AERIAL IN
to G-LINK
DVD recorder
to ANALOG
AERIAL OUT
TV
Aerial cable
(supplied)
to aerial input
: Signal flow
*1 If your set top box receiver does not have an aerial output jack, connect the aerial to the recorder’s
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack.
*2 Connect only if your set top box receiver has a SCART connector.
If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals
This recorder accepts RGB signals. If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals,
connect the TV SCART connector on the set top box receiver to the LINE 1/DECODER jack,
and set “LINE 1 In” to “RGB” in the “Video In/Out” setup (page 131). Refer to the
instructions supplied with the set top box receiver.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
20
About the set top box receiver control function (in areas with GUIDE Plus+ only)
D: Receiving terrestrial (For analogue broadcasting)
Use this hookup if you watch cable programme positions without a set top box receiver. Also
use this hookup if you are only connecting an aerial antenna.
With this hookup, you can record any programme position by selecting the programme
position on the recorder.
Hookups and Settings
You can use the set top box receiver control function with hookup C.
When using the set top box receiver control function:
– The recorder controls the set top box receiver via the supplied set top box controller.
– The recorder controls programme positions on the set top box receiver for timer recording.
– You can use the recorder’s remote control to change programme positions on the set top box
receiver whenever the set top box receiver and recorder are turned on.
After making hookup C, check that the recorder correctly controls the set top box receiver
(page 32).
Wall
to ANALOG AERIAL IN
DVD recorder
to ANALOG AERIAL OUT
TV
to aerial input
Aerial cable (supplied)
: Signal flow
1
Disconnect the aerial cable from your TV, and connect it to ANALOG AERIAL IN on
the rear panel of the recorder.
2
Connect ANALOG AERIAL OUT of the recorder to the aerial input of your TV using
the supplied aerial cable.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
21
Step 2: Connecting the Video Cords/HDMI Cord
Select one of the following patterns, A through E, according to the input jack on your TV
monitor, projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable
you to view pictures.
B
A
TV
Audio/video
cord (not
supplied)
TV, projector, or
audio component
to LINE 2 OUT
(VIDEO)
SCART cord (not supplied)
(yellow)
to T LINE 3 – TV
DVD recorder
(green)
(blue)
to COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
(green)
(blue)
(red)
to HDMI OUT
to LINE 2 OUT
(S VIDEO)
Component video
cord (not supplied)
S-video cord
(not supplied)
(red)
C
D
TV, projector, or audio
component
TV, projector, or audio
component
: Signal flow
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
22
HDMI cord
(not supplied)
E
TV, projector, or
audio component
A SCART input jack
When connecting to the HDMI jack
When setting “LINE 3 Out” to “S-Video” or
“RGB” in the “Video In/Out” setup
(page 131), use a SCART cord that
conforms to the selected signal.
Follow the steps below. Improper handling
may damage the HDMI jack and the
connector.
1
You will enjoy standard quality images.
C S VIDEO input jack
You will enjoy high quality images.
D Component video input jacks (Y, PB/
CB, PR/CR)
You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction
and high quality images.
If your TV accepts progressive 525p/625p
format signals, use this connection and set
“Progressive” to “Compatible” in the “Easy
Setup” setup (page 30). Then set
“Component Video Out” to “Progressive” in
the “Video In/Out” setup to send progressive
video signals. For details, see “Component
Video Out” on page 130.
Connector is upside
down
2
Hookups and Settings
B Video input jack
Carefully align the HDMI jack on the
rear of the recorder and the HDMI
connector by checking their shapes.
Make sure the connector is not upside
down or tilted.
Not straight
Insert the HDMI connector straight into
the HDMI jack.
Do not bend or apply pressure to the
HDMI connector.
E HDMI input jack
Use a certified HDMI cord (not supplied) to
enjoy high quality digital picture and sound
through the HDMI OUT jack.
When connecting a Sony TV that is
compatible with the “Control for HDMI”
function, see page 24.
To see the signals from the connected set top
box receiver when the set top box receiver is
connected to the recorder using a SCART
cord only, turn the recorder on.
b Notes
• Be sure to disconnect the HDMI cord when
moving the recorder.
• Do not apply too much pressure to the cabinet
wall, if you place the recorder on the cabinet
with the HDMI cord connected. It may damage
the HDMI jack or the HDMI cord.
• Do not twist the HDMI connector while
connecting to or disconnecting from the HDMI
jack to avoid damaging the HDMI jack and
connector.
When playing “wide screen” images
Some recorded images may not fit your TV
screen. To change the picture size, see
page 137.
If you are connecting to a VCR
Connect your VCR to the LINE 1/
DECODER jack on the recorder (page 34).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
23
b Notes
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord
between the recorder and your TV at the same
time.
• Do not make connections A and E at the same
time.
• When you connect the recorder to your TV via
the SCART jacks, the TV’s input source is set to
the recorder automatically when you start
playback. If necessary, press the TV t button
on the remote to return the input to the TV.
• If you connect the recorder to a TV with
SMARTLINK, set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in
the “Video In/Out” setup.
• You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack
(connection E) to DVI jacks that are not HDCP
compliant (e.g., DVI jacks on PC displays).
• Component video and RGB signals are not
output when using the HDMI connection.
* This DVD recorder incorporates HighDefinition Multimedia Interface (HDMI™)
technology.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
About the SMARTLINK
features (for SCART
connections only)
If the connected TV (or other connected
equipment such as a set top box receiver)
complies with SMARTLINK, NexTView
Link*3, MEGALOGIC*1, EASYLINK*2,
CINEMALINK*2, Q-Link*3, EURO VIEW
LINK*4, or T-V LINK*5, you can enjoy the
following SMARTLINK features.
• TV Direct Rec. (page 39)
• One-Touch Play (page 74)
• Preset Download
You can download the tuner preset data
from your TV to this recorder, and tune the
recorder according to that data in “Easy
Setup.”
• NexTView Download
You can easily set the timer by using the
NexTView Download function on your
TV.
To prepare for the SMARTLINK features
Set “LINE 3 Out” to “Video” in the “Video
In/Out” setup (page 131) and
“SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder Only” in
the “Options” setup (page 141).
b Notes
• For correct SMARTLINK connection, you will
need a SCART cord that has the full 21 pins.
Refer as well to your TV’s instruction manual
for this connection.
• Not all TVs respond to the functions above.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
“MEGALOGIC” is a registered trademark of
Grundig Corporation.
“EASYLINK” and “CINEMALINK” are
trademarks of Philips Corporation.
“Q-Link” and “NexTView Link” are
trademarks of Panasonic Corporation.
“EURO VIEW LINK” is a trademark of
Toshiba Corporation.
“T-V LINK” is a trademark of JVC
Corporation.
About the “Control for HDMI”
functions for ‘BRAVIA’ Sync
(for HDMI connections only)
By connecting Sony components that are
compatible with the “Control for HDMI”
function with an HDMI cord (not supplied),
operation is simplified as below:
• One-Touch Play (page 74)
• System Power-Off
When you turn the TV off using the power
button on the TV’s remote, the recorder
and components compatible with the
“Control for HDMI” function turn off
automatically. However, the recorder does
not turn off while recording or dubbing
even if you turn off the TV.
• ‘BRAVIA’ Sync display
You can control the recorder by pressing
the SYNC MENU button on the TV’s
remote.
b Notes
• Depending on the connected component, the
“Control for HDMI” function may not work.
Refer to the operating instructions supplied with
the component.
• You can use the ‘BRAVIA’ Sync display feature
only when the connected TV has the SYNC
MENU button. For details on ‘BRAVIA’ Sync,
refer to the operating instructions supplied with
the TV.
• To use the ‘BRAVIA’ Sync features, set
“Control for HDMI” to “On” (default) in the
“HDMI Output” setup (page 140).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
24
Step 3: Connecting the Audio Cords/HDMI Cord
[Speakers]
[Speakers]
Rear (L)
Rear (R)
Audio component with
a decoder
Front (L)
A
Front (R)
Centre
Subwoofer
Hookups and Settings
Select one of the following patterns, A or B, according to the input jack on your TV monitor,
projector, or audio component such as an AV amplifier (receiver). This will enable you to
listen to sound.
to coaxial/HDMI digital input
or
Coaxial digital cord
(not supplied)
HDMI cord
(not supplied)
to DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)
to HDMI OUT
DVD recorder
to LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)
INPUT
B
VIDEO
(yellow)
(white)
L
(white)
(red)
Audio/video cord
(not supplied)
AUDIO
R
(red)
(yellow)*
TV, projector, or
audio component
: Signal flow
* The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 22).
A Digital audio input jack
If your audio component has a Dolby*1
Digital, DTS*2, or MPEG audio decoder and
a digital input jack, use this connection. You
can enjoy Dolby Digital (5.1ch), DTS
(5.1ch), and MPEG audio (5.1ch) surround
effects.
If you connect a Sony audio component that
is compatible with the “Control for HDMI”
function, refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the audio component.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
25
B Audio L/R (left/right) input jacks
This connection will use your TV’s or audio
component’s two speakers for sound.
z Hint
For correct speaker location, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the connected
components.
b Notes
• Do not connect your TV’s audio output jacks to
the LINE IN (R-AUDIO-L) jacks at the same
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come
from your TV’s speakers.
• With connection B, do not connect the LINE IN
(R-AUDIO-L) and LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L)
jacks to your TV’s audio output jacks at the same
time. This will cause unwanted noise to come
from your TV’s speakers.
• With connection A, after you have completed
the connection, make the appropriate settings in
the “Audio Out” setup (page 133). Otherwise, no
sound or a loud noise will come from your
speakers.
• When you connect the recorder to an audio
component using an HDMI cord, you will need
to do one of the following:
– Connect the audio component to the TV with
the HDMI cord, or
– Connect the recorder to the TV with a video
cord other than HDMI cord (component video
cord, S-video cord, or audio/video cord).
*1
Step 4: Inserting a
Conditional Access
Module (CAM) (RDRHXD795/HXD895/
HXD995/HXD1095 only)
Insert a conditional access module (CAM)
provided by your service provider to receive
scrambled digital broadcasting. This
recorder is designed to work with modules
that support the DVB standard. Contact your
service provider to obtain the right kind of
CAM.
Insert the CAM into the CAM slot as far as
it will go.
To remove the CAM
Press Z located on the right side of the CAM
slot.
*2
b Notes
• The CAM slot accepts only Type I and Type II
PC cards. Do not insert other cards or
unacceptable objects into the CAM slot.
• Do not remove or insert the CAM while
receiving broadcasts. This will cause the picture
not to be displayed.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
26
Step 6: Preparing the
Remote
Connect the supplied mains lead to the AC
IN terminal of the recorder. Then plug the
recorder and TV mains leads (AC power
cords) into the mains. After you connect the
mains lead, you must wait for a short
while before operating the recorder.
You can operate the recorder once the front
panel display lights up and the recorder
enters standby mode.
If you connect additional equipment to this
recorder (page 34), be sure to connect the
mains lead after all connections are
complete.
You can control the recorder using the
supplied remote. Insert two R6 (size AA)
batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on
the batteries to the markings inside the
battery compartment. When using the
remote, point it at the remote sensor
on
the recorder.
Hookups and Settings
Step 5: Connecting the
Mains Lead
b Notes
1
to AC IN
2
to mains
• If the supplied remote interferes with your other
Sony DVD recorder or player, change the
command mode number for this recorder
(page 29).
• Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible
leakage and corrosion. Should leakage occur, do
not touch the liquid with bare hands. Observe the
following:
– Do not use a new battery with an old battery, or
batteries of different manufacturers.
– Do not attempt to recharge the batteries.
– If you do not intend to use the remote for an
extended period of time, remove the batteries.
– If battery leakage occurs, wipe out any liquid
inside the battery compartment, and insert new
batteries.
• Do not expose the remote sensor (marked
on
the front panel) to strong light, such as direct
sunlight or a lighting apparatus. The recorder
may not respond to the remote.
• When you replace the batteries of the remote, the
code number and Command Mode may be reset
to the default setting. Set the appropriate code
number and Command Mode again.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
27
Controlling TVs with the
remote
You can adjust the remote’s signal to control
your TV.
b Notes
• Depending on the connected unit, you may not
be able to control your TV with some or all of the
buttons below.
• If you enter a new code number, the code
number previously entered will be erased.
Number
buttons
Code numbers of controllable TVs
If more than one code number is listed,
try entering them one at a time until you
find the one that works with your TV.
Manufacturer
Code number
Sony
01 (default)
Grundig
11
Hitachi
24
ITT
15, 16
JVC
33
LG/Goldstar
76
Loewe
45
Nokia
15, 16, 69, 73
Panasonic
17, 49
TV/DVD
DISPLAY
TV [/1
TV t
TV 2 +/–
1
2
Philips
06, 07, 08, 72
Saba
12, 13, 74
Samsung
22, 23, 71
Sanyo
25
Sharp
29
Telefunken
36
Thomson
43, 75
Toshiba
38
The remote performs the following:
Buttons
Operations
TV [/1
Turns your TV on or
off.
Hold down TV [/1 located at the
bottom of the remote.
TV 2 (volume)
+/–
Adjusts the volume
of your TV.
Do not press the [/1 button at the top of
the remote.
TV PROG +/–
With TV [/1 pressed down, enter the
TV’s manufacturer code using the
number buttons.
Selects the
programme position
on your TV.
TV t (input
select)
Switches your TV’s
input source.
TV PROG
+/–
For instance, to enter “09,” press “0”
then “9.” After you enter the last
number, release the TV [/1 button.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
28
To operate the TV/DVD button
(for SCART connections only)
Changing programme
positions of the recorder using
the remote
You can change programme positions of the
recorder using the number buttons.
Example: for channel 50
Press “5,” “0,” then press ENTER.
z Hint
If the aerial cables are connected to both DIGITAL
AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL IN jacks,
you can switch between digital broadcasting and
analogue broadcasting using the INPUT button.
Hookups and Settings
The TV/DVD button switches between TV
mode and DVD mode. Press the TV/DVD
button when in stop mode or no menu
appears on the TV screen. Point your remote
at the recorder when using this button.
TV mode: switch to this when you use the
TV’s tuner mainly. When you start
playback, the input source for the TV is set
to the recorder automatically.
DVD mode: switch to this when you use the
recorder’s tuner mainly.
To check the current mode, press DISPLAY
(page 43).
If you have a Sony DVD player
or more than one Sony DVD
recorder
If the supplied remote interferes with your
other Sony DVD recorder or player, set the
command mode number for this recorder
and the supplied remote to one that differs
from the other Sony DVD recorder or player
after you have completed “Step 7: Easy
Setup.”
The default command mode setting for this
recorder and the supplied remote is “3
(Default setting).”
You can check the current Command Mode
in the front panel display. For details, see
page 141.
The default command mode setting for this
recorder and the supplied remote is “3
(Default setting).”
The remote does not function if different
command modes are set for the recorder
and remote. Set the same command mode.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
29
Step 7: Easy Setup
Make the basic adjustments by following the
on-screen instructions in “Easy Setup.”
Be careful not to disconnect the cables or
exit the “Easy Setup” function during this
procedure.
[/1
GUIDE
EXIT/
O RETURN
</M/m/,,
ENTER
TV [/1
1
Select “Start” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
Follow the on-screen instructions to
make the following settings.
Aerial Power (for RDR-HXD795/
HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095 (except
models for the UK) only)
Selects whether to supply the power to
the indoor aerial connected to the
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack.
• To supply the power whether the
recorder is turned on or in standby,
select “On.”
• To supply the power only when the
recorder is turned on, select “Auto.”
• Select “Off” to not supply the power.
D.TV Auto Channel Setting
• If the aerial cable is connected to the
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack (hookup
A or B), select “Auto Scan.” Then,
select your country/region using </
,, and press ENTER. The recorder
will automatically capture and store
the available TV and Radio channels.
• If the aerial cable is connected to the
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (hookup
C or D) only, select “Do not set.”
For details, see page 18.
Turn on the recorder and your TV.
Then switch the input selector on your
TV so that the signal from the
recorder appears on your TV screen.
The “Language” display appears.
• If the “Language” display does not
appear, select “Easy Setup” in the
“Basic” setup from “Initial Setup” in
the System Menu (page 125).
2
3
Select a language for the on-screen
displays using </M/m/,, and
press ENTER.
A.TV Auto Channel Setting
• If the aerial cable is connected to the
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (except
hookup A) and the TV is connected to
this recorder not using SMARTLINK,
select “Auto Scan.” Then, select your
country/region using </,, and
press ENTER. The programme
position order will be set according to
the country/region you set.
The initial settings message appears.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
30
Hookups and Settings
EPG Type Select
Select the EPG (Electronic Programme
Guide) type to use.
If no programme positions for digital
broadcasts are found after scanning, the
“EPG Type Select” display does not
appear. The EPG type is automatically
set to the country/area you select when
setting the programme positions.
• Select “Guide (Digital)” to use the
digital electronic programme guide
(see page 50).
Select “Guide (Digital)” if you receive
only digital broadcasts.
• If the aerial cable is connected to the
ANALOG AERIAL IN jack (except
hookup A) and the TV is connected to
this recorder with SMARTLINK,
select “Download from TV” (For
details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with your TV).
Then, select your country/region using
</,, and press ENTER. The tuner
preset data will be downloaded from
your TV to this recorder.
• If the aerial cable is connected to the
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack (hookup
A) only, or to skip this setting, select
“Do not set.” Then, select your
country/region using </,, and
press ENTER.
To set the programme positions
manually, see page 126.
For details, see page 18.
Clock Setting
The recorder will automatically set the
clock when any digital channels have
been scanned and stored. If the clock has
already been set, this setting is skipped
and the “EPG Type Select” setting
screen appears.
• Select “Auto” when a programme
position in your local area broadcasts a
time signal. The “Auto Clock Setting”
display appears.
Select a programme position that
carries a time signal and then “Start”
using </,/m, and press ENTER.
If a clock signal cannot be found, press
O RETURN, and set the clock
manually.
• Select “Manual” to set the clock
manually. The “Manual Clock
Setting” display appears.
1
Select the time zone for your area
or GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
using </,, and press m.
2
Select “On” using </, if you
are now on summer time, and
press ENTER.
3
Set the day, month, year, hour and
minutes using </M/m/,, and
press ENTER to start the clock.
• Select “GUIDE Plus+” to use the
Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ electronic
programme guide (see page 61).
TV Type (page 137)
• If you have a widescreen TV, select
“Wide (16:9).”
• If you have a standard TV, select
“Standard (4:3).” This will determine
how “widescreen” images are
displayed on your TV.
Progressive
When you connect a progressive format
TV to this recorder using the
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks,
select “Compatible.”
HDD caution messages
Read the HDD caution messages, and
press ENTER.
4
Select “Finish Setup” using M/m,
and press ENTER.
“Easy Setup” is completed.
Go to “Setting up the GUIDE Plus+®
system (For analogue broadcasting/in
areas with GUIDE Plus+ only)”
(page 32) to use the Gemstar GUIDE
Plus+ electronic programme guide.
To return to the previous step
Press O RETURN.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
31
z Hint
If you want to run “Easy Setup” again, select
“Easy Setup” in the “Basic” setup from “Initial
Setup” in the System Menu (page 125).
External Receiver 1/External
Receiver 2/External Receiver 3 (only
when connecting the set top box
receiver)
1
2
Press ENTER to select “Continue.”
3
Select the provider using M/m, and
press ENTER.
4
Select the receiver brand using M/
m, and press ENTER.
If you select “Other providers,” you
can select a receiver brand from a
list of all available brands.
If your receiver brand is not on the
list, select “???.”
The receiver brand list is
automatically updated, so your
receiver may be available at a later
date. Select your brand when it
becomes available. Until then, use
“???.”
5
Language
Select a language for the on-screen
displays using M/m, and press ENTER.
Select the connection you used for
your set top box receiver using M/
m, and press ENTER.
When the set top box receiver is
connected to the recorder using
hookup C with both an aerial cable
and a SCART cord, select either
“Line1” or “Antenna.”
The display asks for confirmation.
6
Country
Select a country/area using M/m, and
press ENTER.
Press ENTER to select “Continue.”
The Video Window switches to the
specified programme position.
7
Select “YES” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
If the Video Window does not
switch to the specified programme
position, select “NO” and press
ENTER until the Video Window
switches to the specified
programme position.
Setting up the GUIDE Plus+®
system (For analogue
broadcasting/in areas with
GUIDE Plus+ only)
Follow the instructions below to set up the
GUIDE Plus+ system and use the connected
set top box receiver.
1
Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Basic
Setup” appears.
2
Select an item using M/m, and press
ENTER. Then set each item.
Postal Code
Enter your postal code using </M/m/
,, and press ENTER.
If “Country” is set to “Others,” you
cannot enter a postal code and the
GUIDE Plus+ system will not search for
a host channel.
• If you do not need to set up the GUIDE
Plus+ system, press SYSTEM MENU
to exit.
• Even if you cannot use the GUIDE
Plus+ system where you live, you can
still set up a manual recording. See
“Setting the timer manually
(Schedule)” on page 68.
Select the set top box receiver type
using M/m, and press ENTER.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
32
3
Turn off the recorder to receive GUIDE
Plus+ system data.
Once you have confirmed that the set top
box controller controls your set top box
receiver, fix it in place.
1
Remove the backing on the doublesided tape.
2
Attach it so that the set top box
controller is directly above the remote
control sensor on your set top box
receiver.
b Note
You cannot set tuner system or “OSD Language”
to a country/region or language that is not
supported by the GUIDE Plus+ system.
Hookups and Settings
To receive GUIDE Plus+ system
data your recorder must be turned off
when not in use. If your recorder is
connected to a set top box receiver,
be sure to leave the set top box
receiver turned on. After initial
setup, it may take up to 24 hours to
begin receiving TV programme
listings.
To fix the set top box controller to your set
top box receiver
If you cannot get the recorder to control
your set top box receiver
Check the connection and position of the set
top box controller (page 20).
If your set top box receiver still does not
operate with this recorder, refer to the
instructions supplied with your set top box
receiver and contact your cable or satellite
company to see if they can provide you with
a compatible set top box receiver.
To change the basic GUIDE Plus+ settings
1
2
Press GUIDE.
3
Select “Basic Setup” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
4
Repeat from step 2 of “Setting up the
GUIDE Plus+® system (For analogue
broadcasting/in areas with GUIDE
Plus+ only)” on page 32.
b Notes
• The list of external receivers controllable by the
GUIDE Plus+ system is updated constantly and
is distributed through GUIDE Plus+ system data
signals. Since the time your recorder has been
produced and the time you installed your
recorder for the first time, new external receiver
codes might have been added.
• If the external receiver is still not on the list or is
not controlled properly by the recorder, please
call Customer Support to report the brand and
model of your external receiver.
Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar using M/
,, and press ENTER.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
33
Connecting a VCR or Similar Device
After disconnecting the recorder’s mains lead from the mains, connect a VCR or similar
recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder.
Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack (i.LINK jack)
(page 98).
For details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment.
To record on this recorder, see “Recording from Connected Equipment” on page 60.
Connecting to the LINE 1/DECODER jack
Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 1/DECODER jack of this recorder.
VCR
TV
SCART cord (not supplied)
to SCART input
to i LINE 1/DECODER
to T LINE 3 – TV
DVD recorder
b Notes
• Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded.
• If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR, you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen.
DVD recorder
VCR
TV
Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your TV in the order shown below. To watch
video tapes, watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV.
Line input 1
VCR
DVD recorder
TV
Line input 2
• The SMARTLINK features are not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder’s LINE 1/
DECODER jack.
• To watch the connected VCR or similar device’s pictures through the recorder while the recorder is in
standby mode, set “Power Save” to “Off” (default) in the “Basic” setup (page 125).
• When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder, do not switch the input source to TV by pressing
the TV/DVD button on the remote.
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you will not be able to view the signals from the connected
VCR.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
34
Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel
Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder. If the
equipment has an S-video jack, you can use an S-video cord instead of an audio/video cord.
VCR, etc.
OUTPUT
VIDEO
AUDIO
L
S-video cord
(not supplied)
Hookups and Settings
S VIDEO
R
Audio/video cord
(not supplied)
to LINE 2 IN
: Signal flow
DVD recorder
z Hint
When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound, connect to only the L(MONO) and VIDEO
input jacks on the front of the recorder. Do not connect the R input jack.
b Notes
• Do not connect the yellow LINE IN (VIDEO) jack when using an S-video cord.
• Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment’s input jack with the other
equipment’s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder. This may cause noise (feedback).
• Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
35
Connecting an External Decoder
You can watch or record external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder)
programmes if you connect a decoder (not supplied) to the recorder. Disconnect the recorder’s
mains lead from the mains when connecting the decoder. Note that when you set “LINE 1 In”
to “Decoder” in step 7 of “Setting external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal Plus analogue decoder)
programme positions” (page 37), you will not be able to select “L1” because Line 1 will
become a dedicated line for the decoder.
Connecting a decoder
External decoder (PAY-TV/
Canal Plus analogue decoder)
TV
to AERIAL IN
Aerial cable
(supplied)
to T LINE 3 – TV
to AERIAL OUT
to SCART input
SCART cord
(not supplied)
SCART cord
(not supplied)
to i LINE 1/DECODER
DVD recorder
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
36
Setting external decoder (PAYTV/Canal Plus analogue
decoder) programme positions
12 Select your country/region, and press
ENTER.
Programme position
1
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2
Select “Initial Setup,” and press
ENTER.
3
Select “Video In/Out,” and press
ENTER.
4
Select “LINE 3 Out,” and press
ENTER.
13 Select the desired programme
Hookups and Settings
To watch or record PAY-TV/Canal Plus
analogue programmes, set your recorder to
receive the programme positions using the
on-screen display.
In order to set the programme positions
correctly, be sure to follow all of the steps
below.
position using PROG +/– or number
buttons.
14 Select “Channel” using M/m, and
select the external decoder
programme position using </,.
15 Select “Sound System” using M/m,
and select an available TV system, B/
G, D/K, I, or L using </,.
To receive broadcasts in France, select
“L.”
16 Select “Decoder” using M/m, and
select “On” using </,.
17 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit the
menu.
5
Press M/m to select “Video” or
“RGB,” and press ENTER.
6
7
Select “LINE 1 In,” and press ENTER.
8
Press O RETURN to return the
cursor to the left column.
9
Select “Analog Tuner,” and press
ENTER.
Press M/m to select “Decoder,” and
press ENTER.
10 Select “Manual CH Setting,” and
press ENTER.
11 Select “Next Screen,” and press
ENTER.
To return to the previous step
Press O RETURN.
b Notes
• If you disconnect the recorder’s mains lead, you
will not be able to view the signals from the
connected decoder.
• To watch the connected external decoder (PAYTV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes
during recording, press the PROGRAM + button
on the recorder (“SCART THRU” appears on
the front panel display). To return to the previous
display, press the PROGRAM – button on the
recorder (“SCART NORM” appears on the front
panel display). The recorder automatically
switches to the programme tuned by the
recorder’s tuner after the recording has finished.
To watch the connected external decoder (PAYTV/Canal Plus analogue decoder) programmes
while the recorder is in standby mode, set
“Power Save” to “Off” (default) in the “Basic”
setup (page 125).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
37
Seven Basic Operations
— Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
1. Inserting a Disc
+RW
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
DVD
VCD
+R
-RVR
CD
DATA DVD
DATA CD
Z (open/
close)
DVD
2. Recording a
Programme
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
This section introduces the basic operation
to record a current TV programme to the
hard disk (HDD) or to a disc (DVD). For an
explanation of how to make timer
recordings, see page 53 (Digital
broadcasting) or page 66 (Analogue
broadcasting).
HDD
DVD
PROG +/–
1
2
Press DVD.
INPUT
Press Z (open/close), and place a
disc on the disc tray.
X
Recording/playing side facing down
3
z REC
x REC
STOP
Press Z (open/close) to close the
disc tray.
Wait until “LOAD” disappears from the
front panel display.
Unused DVDs are formatted
automatically.
• For DVD-RW discs
DVD-RWs are formatted in the
recording format (VR mode or Video
mode) set by “Format DVD-RW” of
“Basic” in the “Disc Setup” setup
(page 123).
• For DVD-R discs
DVD-Rs are automatically formatted
in Video mode. To format an unused
DVD-R in VR mode, format the disc
in the “Format” setup (page 49)
before you make a recording.
If the disc is recordable on this recorder,
you can manually re-format the disc to
make a blank disc (page 49).
1
Press HDD or DVD.
If you want to record to a DVD, insert a
recordable DVD.
2
Press PROG +/– to select the
programme position or input source
you want to record.
To switch between digital broadcasting
and analogue broadcasting, press
INPUT. (Available when the aerial
cables are connected to both DIGITAL
AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL
IN jacks only.)
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
38
REC MODE
3
Press REC MODE repeatedly to select
the recording mode.
Each time you press the button, the
display on the TV screen changes as
follows:
For more details about the recording
mode, see page 154.
4
Press z REC.
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press x REC STOP.
To pause recording
Press X.
To resume recording, press X again.
To watch another TV programme while
recording
• To turn off the TV Direct Rec. function, set
“SMARTLINK” to “Pass Through” in the
“Options” setup (page 141).
• Some buttons, such as the TITLE LIST button or
H button, do not work when “TV” appears in
the front panel display.
• If you press the [/1 button while recording, the
recorder stops recording and turns off.
• After pressing the z REC button, it may take a
short while to start recording.
• It may take a short while for recorder to stop or
pause recording.
• You cannot change the recording mode while
recording.
• Programmes are recorded in the original aspect
ratio when recording to the HDD (when “HDD
Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode Off”
in the “Recording” setup (page 137))/DVDRWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode).
• When recording to DVD-R DLs (Video mode),
the title is divided when the layer switches.
• If there is a power failure, the programme you
are recording may be erased.
• You cannot watch a PAY-TV/Canal Plus
programme while recording another PAY-TV/
Canal Plus programme.
• To use the TV Direct Rec. function, you must
first correctly set the recorder’s clock.
If your TV is connected to the T LINE 3 –
TV jack, set your TV to the TV input using
the TV/DVD button and select the
programme you want to watch. If your TV is
connected to the LINE 2 OUT or
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks, set the
TV to TV input using the TV t button
(page 28).
Seven Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
* Available when “Manual Rec. Mode” is set
to “On (go to setup)” in the “Recording”
setup (page 135).
b Notes
TV Direct Rec. (for SMARTLINK
connections only)
When the TV is turned on and the recorder is
turned off, press TV PAUSE. The recorder
automatically turns on and starts recording
what you are watching on the TV to the
HDD.
Set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 142).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
39
Checking the disc status while
recording
You can check the recording information
such as recording time or disc type.
Press DISPLAY during recording.
The recording information appears.
3. Playing the Recorded
Programme (Title List)
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
To play a recorded title, select the title from
the Title List.
HDD
DVD
TITLE LIST
</M/m/,,
ENTER
A Recording mode
B Recording time
C Disc type/format
D Recording status
1
Press HDD or DVD.
If you select DVD, insert a DVD (see “1.
Inserting a Disc” on page 38).
Playback starts automatically depending
on the disc.
To turn off the display
Press DISPLAY repeatedly.
2
Press TITLE LIST.
Example: 4-Title List for HDD
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
40
A Disc type:
To stop playback
Displays the media type, HDD or DVD.
B Total number of titles
Press x (stop).
To scroll the list display by page (Page
mode)
C Sub-menu:
Press ./> while the Title List is
displayed. Each time you press ./>,
the Title List changes to the previous/next
page of titles.
About the Title List for DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs
(VR mode)
You can switch the Title List to show
Original or Playlist titles.
Sub-menu
D Scroll bar:
Appears when all of the titles do not fit
on the list. To view the hidden titles,
press M/m.
E Title information:
“Recording”: Indicates that the title is
currently being recorded.
: Indicates a protected title.
“NEW”: Indicates that the title is newly
recorded (not played back) (HDD only).
: Press DISPLAY to display
“
.” “
” indicates titles
containing “Copy-Once” copy
protection signals (HDD only)
(page 157).
: Indicates that the title is recorded
using the Update function.
Genre icons: Indicates the title’s genre
(HDD only).
: Indicates a bilingual programme
(HDD only).
F Remaining time of the current disc in
the current recording mode (example:
SP mode)
3
1
Press < while the Title List is
displayed.
2
Select “Play List” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
3
Select “Original” or “Play List” using
M/m, and press ENTER.
To change the title order for HDD (Sort
Titles)
1
Press < while the Title List is
displayed.
2
Select “Sort Titles” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
3
Select the item using M/m, and press
ENTER.
Order
Sorted
By Date
In order of when the titles
were recorded. The title
that is recorded most
recently is listed at the
top.
Unseen Title
In order of when the titles
were recorded. The title
that is recorded most
recently and has not been
played is listed at the top.
By Title
In alphabetical order.
By Number
In order of recorded title
number.
Select a title using M/m, and press
ENTER.
Seven Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
Press , to display the sub-menu.
The sub-menu displays options
applicable only to the selected item. The
displayed options differ depending upon
the model, situation, and disc type.
Playback starts from the selected title.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
41
To search for a title by genre (HDD only)
To change the thumbnail preview mode
(Set Preview) (HDD only)
1
Press < while the Title List is
displayed.
2
Select “Genre” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
You can select “Quick Preview” or
“Normal” for the thumbnail preview mode
in the Title List. Set “Set Preview” in the
“Options” setup (page 142).
3
Select a genre using M/m, and press
ENTER.
To switch to the 8 Title List
To change a title thumbnail picture
(Thumbnail)
After recording, the first scene of the
recording (the title) is automatically set as
the thumbnail picture.
You can select a favourite scene for the
thumbnail picture shown in the Title List.
1
Press TITLE LIST.
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode),
switch the Title List to show Original or
Playlist titles, if necessary.
2
Select a title using M/m, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3
Select “Edit” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
4
Select “Set Thumbnail” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
The display for setting the thumbnail
point appears and the title starts to play.
5
6
While watching the playback picture,
press H, X, c
m/M
C
or PLAY MODE to select the scene you
want to set for a thumbnail picture, and
press X.
Playback pauses.
Select “OK” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
The scene is set for the title’s thumbnail
picture.
To return to the Title List, press
O RETURN.
1
Press < while the Title List is
displayed.
2
Select “Title View” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
3
Select “8 Titles” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
Detailed information, including the
resumption time, for the selected title is
shown below the list.
To turn off the Title List
Press TITLE LIST.
b Notes
• The title names may not appear for DVDs
created on other DVD recorders.
• It may take a few seconds for the thumbnail
pictures to be displayed.
• After editing, the title thumbnail picture may
change to the first scene of the recording (title).
• After dubbing, the title thumbnail picture set on
the source recording is cancelled.
• In some areas, letters or symbols that the
recorder cannot record or display are replaced
with “*.”
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
42
Displaying the playing time
and play information
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
DVD
VCD
+R
CD
DATA DVD DATA CD
Press DISPLAY repeatedly.
The displays differ depending on the disc
type or playing status.
In stop mode
Example: DVD-RW in VR mode
F Audio setting for the current
programme
G Recording restrictions for the current
programme
H TV mode or DVD mode (page 29)
I Disc information
J Title type (Original or Playlist) for
DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode
K Disc type/format (page 151)
Displays the finalised disc in Video
mode as “DVD-VIDEO.”
L Title number-Chapter number
(page 80)
M Playing time
N Multi-angles indicator (page 75)
O Copy-protected indicator (page 157)
P Data transfer bar and rate
To turn off the display
Press DISPLAY repeatedly.
During playback
Example: DVD-R in Video mode
Seven Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
You can check the playing time of the
current title, chapter, track, or disc. Also,
you can check the disc name recorded on the
DVD/CD.
E Station name and programme position
number
z Hints
• When “On Screen Display” is set to “On”
(default) in the “Options” setup (page 141),
information automatically appears on the screen
when the recorder is operated.
• To increase disc space, see “To open up disc
space” (page 82).
b Note
Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be
displayed correctly.
A Playing status
B Shows that the Resume Play is
available (page 74).
C Current selected recording mode
(maximum DVD recording time)
(page 154)
D Remaining time
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
43
4. Changing the Name of
a Recorded Programme
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
4
The display for entering characters
appears.
The current name is displayed at the
input row.
+R
-RWVR -RWVideo
Select “Title Name” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
Input row
You can label a DVD, title, or programme by
entering characters. You can enter up to 64
characters for a title recorded in the HDD/
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), 40
characters for a title recorded in the
DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode), but the
actual number of characters displayed in the
menus such as the Title List will vary. The
steps below explain how to change the name
of the recorded programme.
5
Move the cursor to the point where
you want to insert the character using
m/M.
To erase all of the characters, press and
hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.
6
Select “Upper case” or “Lower case”
using ./>.
The characters for the selected type are
displayed.
TITLE LIST
7
</M/m/,,
ENTER
.
m
The selected character appears at the
input row.
To insert a space, press X (or select
“Space,” and press ENTER).
>
M
x
8
1
2
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the
remaining characters.
To erase a character, move the cursor to
the character at the input row, and press
CLEAR (or select “Clear,” and press
ENTER).
To insert a character, move the cursor to
the right of the point where you want to
insert the character. Then select the
character, and press ENTER.
To erase all of the characters, press and
hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more.
Press TITLE LIST.
Select a title using M/m, and press
,.
The sub-menu appears.
3
Press </M/m/, to select the
character you want to enter, and
press ENTER.
Select “Edit” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
9
Press x (or select “OK,” and press
ENTER).
To cancel the setting, press
O RETURN.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
44
5. Labelling and
Protecting a Disc
4
Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.
5
Select “Input Disc Name,” and press
ENTER.
6
Select “Next Screen,” and press
ENTER.
You can execute options effective for the
entire disc in the “Disc Setup” setup.
</M/m/,,
ENTER
b Note
The disc name may not appear when the disc is
played on other DVD equipment.
Labelling a disc
+RW
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
-RVR
-RVideo
1
2
Insert a disc.
-RWVR
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 38.
1
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3
Protecting a disc
Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER.
Seven Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
Enter the disc name (page 44).
You can enter up to 64 characters for a
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) disc
name, and 40 characters for a
DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) disc
name.
SYSTEM
MENU
-RVR
Insert a disc.
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 38.
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3
Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
45
4
Select “Basic,” and press ENTER.
6. Playing the Disc on
Other DVD Equipment
(Finalise)
+RW
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
-RVR
-RVideo
5
Select “Protect Disc,” and press
ENTER.
6
7
Select “On,” and press ENTER.
Finalising is necessary when you play discs
recorded with this recorder on other DVD
equipment.
When you finalise a DVD+RW, DVD-RW
(Video mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video
mode), a DVD menu will be automatically
created, which can be displayed on other
DVD equipment.
Before finalising, check the differences
between the disc types in the table below.
Differences between disc types
+RW
Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
To cancel the protection
Select “Off” in step 6.
z Hint
You can set protection for individual titles
(page 83).
-RWVR
-RWVideo
Discs are automatically finalised
when removed from the recorder.
However, you may need to finalise
the disc for certain DVD
equipment, or if the recording time
is short. You can edit or record on
the disc even after finalising.
Finalising is unnecessary when
playing a disc on VR format
compatible equipment.
Even if your other DVD equipment
is VR format compatible, you may
need to finalise the disc, especially
if the recording time is short. You
can edit or record on the disc even
after finalising.
Finalising is necessary when
playing on any equipment other
than this recorder.
After finalising, you cannot edit or
record on the disc. If you want to
record on it again, unfinalise
(page 48) or reformat the disc
(page 49). However, if you
reformat the disc, all recorded
contents will be erased.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
46
-RVR
+R
-RVideo
Finalising is necessary. The disc
can be played only on equipment
that supports DVD-R in VR mode.
You can edit or record on the disc
even after finalising (except DVDR DL in VR mode).
Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.
5
6
Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.
Select “Next Screen,” and press
ENTER.
For DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode), the
recorder starts finalising the disc. Go to
step 9.
7
SYSTEM
MENU
The menu appears in the selected title
menu style when the “top menu” (or
“menu” for a DVD+RW/DVD+R) is
selected on the DVD equipment.
</M/m/,,
ENTER
8
1
2
(DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)
Select a title menu style, and press
ENTER.
Insert a disc.
(DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode) only)
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 38.
The recorder starts finalising the disc.
Press SYSTEM MENU.
9
Seven Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
Finalising is necessary when
playing on any equipment other
than this recorder.
After finalising, you cannot edit or
record on the disc.
4
Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
The System Menu appears.
3
Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER.
z Hint
You can check whether the disc has been finalised
or not. Press DISPLAY after step 1 (page 43).
b Notes
• Depending on the condition of the disc,
recording, or the DVD equipment, discs may not
play even if the discs are finalised.
• The recorder may not be able to finalise the disc
if it was recorded on another recorder.
• Inserting an unfinalised disc into other DVD
equipment may damage the recorded contents.
• When using a DVD+RW, you can edit or record
on the disc even after finalising. However, the
title menu will not be displayed. Finalise the disc
again to display the title menu.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
47
Unfinalising a disc
5
Select “Unfinalise,” and press
ENTER.
6
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
-RWVR -RWVideo
For DVD-RWs (Video mode)
DVD-RWs (Video mode) that have been
finalised to prohibit additional recording or
editing can be unfinalised to allow further
recording or editing.
For DVD-RWs (VR mode)
If you cannot record or edit on a DVD-RW
(VR mode) that has been finalised with other
DVD equipment, unfinalise the disc.
The recorder starts unfinalising the disc.
Unfinalising may take several minutes.
b Note
The recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD-RWs
(Video mode) that have been finalised on another
recorder.
1
Insert a disc.
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 38.
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3
Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER.
4
Select “Finalise,” and press ENTER.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
48
7. Reformatting a Disc
+RW
-RWVR -RWVideo
-RVR
4
Select “Format,” and press ENTER.
5
Select an item, and press ENTER.
-RVideo
“VR Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/DVDRs in VR mode.
“Video Mode”: Formats DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs in Video mode.
“Format DVD+RW”: Formats
DVD+RWs.
6
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
All contents on the disc are erased.
SYSTEM
MENU
</M/m/,,
ENTER
z Hint
By reformatting, you can change the recording
format on DVD-RWs, or record again on DVDRWs that have been finalised.
b Note
You cannot reformat recorded DVD-Rs.
1
Seven Basic Operations — Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder
New discs are automatically formatted when
inserted. If necessary, you can manually reformat a DVD+RW, DVD-RW, or DVD-R
disc to make a blank disc. For DVD-RWs or
DVD-Rs, you can select a recording format
(VR mode or Video mode) according to your
needs.
Insert a disc.
See “1. Inserting a Disc” on page 38.
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3
Select “Disc Setup,” and press
ENTER.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
49
Press GUIDE.
This display consists of an information box
and an 8-channel programme list covering a
30-minute period.
Guide to Digital Services
(For Freeview)
Viewing the EPG
(Electronic Programme
Guide) Display
Example of EPG Display:
The Electronic Programme Guide is a guide
showing the television programme schedule
for a day or more at a time on your television
(via the Digital Terrestrial Television tuner
included in this recorder).
The EPG provides a quick and easy way to:
• View a complete list of all available
channels.
• View a channel list related to a chosen date
or genre.
• Set a programme to be recorded (page 53).
b Notes
• Digital Services availability and content depend
on the broadcaster.
• Digital Services are not instantly available when
the recorder is first turned on.
• In some areas, not all programme information is
displayed if you display the EPG while
recording.
A Indicates the currently selected
channel number and station name
with the programme title and genre.
B Indicates the currently selected
programme and allows you to move
around the list.
Press ENTER to watch the selected
programme.
C Channel name
D Indicates if a timer recording is
associated with the programme
(page 53).
E Colour buttons
Press the same colour button on the
remote (“Timer,” “Jump,” and
“Search”).
Red button
Green button
EXIT/
O RETURN
PAGE –
Blue button
Yellow button
GUIDE
INFO
</M/m/,,
ENTER
PAGE +
F Truncated programme title in case the
name is too long to be displayed in the
cell.
G Indicates that short programmes that
are not displayed on the list are
scheduled.
H Time slot
I Indicates the current time and date.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
50
Available buttons in the programme list
Operations
</M/m/,
Selects the desired item.
PAGE +/–
Displays the previous/next
eight channels.
INFO
Displays the detailed
information of the
programme (page 51).
Colour buttons
(red, yellow,
green, blue)
Activates the same colour
function on the screen.
O RETURN
Closes the display.
Programme Information
You can view descriptions of the
programmes being broadcast now and next.
Displaying the programme
information
1
2
Select a channel.
Press INFO.
The Information display appears
showing a description of the current
programme on view.
Available buttons in the Information
display
Buttons
Operations
M/m
Toggles the display
between description of the
current/next programme.
</,
Displays programme
information for other
channels.
ENTER
Displays the selected
channel.
INFO
Displays the detailed
programme information.
Guide to Digital Services (For Freeview)
Buttons
Viewing Teletext (not
available in some areas)
You can view the Teletext that comes
simultaneously with certain programmes.
Press
(text).
The Teletext screen appears.
You can also use any of colour buttons.
To exit the Teletext service
Press
(text) again.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
51
Viewing a Digital Text
Service (models for the
UK only)
Many digital TV channels broadcast
information via their text service. This
digital service includes high-quality digital
text and graphics along with advanced
navigation options. Additionally, this
recorder has access to dedicated text
channels transmitted by the broadcasters.
b Note
The appearance, content and navigation methods
of all digital text services are decided by the
broadcaster.
Selecting digital text from
dedicated digital teletext
channels
1
Selecting digital text from
other channels
Digital text services may also be available
on other digital channels. This is sometimes
indicated by a small symbol on your TV
screen, superimposed on the programme you
are watching.
1
2
Select a channel.
Press
(text) or the button
indicated on screen by the
broadcaster.
The text information appears.
3
Access required information using
</M/m/,, the colour buttons and/
or the number buttons.
To exit the text service
Follow the on-screen instructions, or press
(text) or EXIT/O RETURN.
Select a dedicated channel that is
broadcasting digital text.
You can search for a dedicated digital
text channel using the “Electronic
Programme Guide” (page 50).
The text page is displayed.
2
Once the text page is displayed (this
may take some time), follow the onscreen instructions to obtain your
required selection.
On some pages the TV programme may
also be displayed on the text screen. Onscreen instructions will inform you how
to change the displayed programme.
If you are instructed to press “OK” or
“Select” when viewing the text pages,
press ENTER.
To exit the text service
Follow the on-screen instructions, or press
PROG +/–.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
52
Recording (For Freeview)
Timer Recording (EPG/
Series/Manual)
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
Before you start recording…
• Check that the disc has enough available
space for the recording (page 43). For the
HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you
can free up disc space by erasing titles
(page 82).
• Adjust the recording picture quality if
necessary (page 120).
TIMER
O RETURN
Yellow button
GUIDE
INFO
</M/m/,,
ENTER
x REC
STOP
Recording (For Freeview)
You can set the timer for a total of 32
programmes, up to 30 days in advance.
Methods to set the timer include:
• EPG: Set a programme to be recorded
based on the information provided by the
EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)
(page 53).
• Series Recording (models for the UK
only): Automatically sets the recorder to
record programmes in a series (page 55).
• Manual: Set the date, time, and programme
position of the programme manually.
Red button
Green button
Recording TV programmes
using the EPG
The EPG function is a feature that simplifies
setting the timer. Just select the programme
you want to record in the EPG display. The
date, time, and channel of that programme
are set automatically.
1
Press GUIDE.
2
Select a programme using </M/m/
,.
b Note
If digital teletext is operated or subtitles are
displayed while recording, they will be recorded
on the disc (page 135).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
53
3
Press the red button.
The date, start and stop times,
programme position, recording mode,
etc., settings appear.
• If you want to change the setting,
follow step 3 of “Setting the timer
manually (Manual)” (page 56).
• (Models for the UK only) You can set
“EPG Link” (page 56) or “Series
Recording” (page 55).
4
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
“ ” (red) appears next to the
programme which is set for timer
recording. Your recorder will
automatically begin recording when the
programme starts.
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn
off the recorder before the timer
recording starts.
• To modify the timer setting, see
page 59.
To search for programmes by date
(Jump)
1
Press the green button while the
programme list is displayed.
2
3
4
Select a date in the “Date” row.
Select a time in the “Time” row.
Select “Jump,” and press ENTER.
To search for programmes by genre
(Search)
1
Press the yellow button while the
programme list is displayed.
2
3
4
Select a date in the “Date” row.
5
Select a genre using </M/m/,, and
press ENTER.
6
7
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
Select a time in the “Time” row.
Select the “Genre” row, and press
ENTER.
Select “Search,” and press ENTER.
To stop recording during timer recording
Press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.
Rec. Mode Adjust
If there is not enough available disc space for
the recording, the recorder automatically
adjusts the recording mode to enable the
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”
setup (page 135).
z Hints
• When you select “AUTO” for the recording
mode, the recorder automatically maximises the
recording quality for the space available on the
inserted disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on
to a blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD).
• This recorder is featured with an EPG timer auto
extend functionality that allows EPG timer
recordings to be made in case of an early start
(before the scheduled start time) or late finish
(after the scheduled end time).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
54
Recording programmes using
Series Recording (models for
the UK only)
Series Recording is a feature which allows
you to automatically record programmes in a
series, using the information from the EPG.
You can also search for programmes related
to the timer settings.
1
After step 2 of “Recording TV
programmes using the EPG,” press
INFO.
The yellow button (“Series”) in the onscreen display is activated when the
selected programme has series
information.
2
Press the yellow button (“Series”).
Series programmes of the selected
programme are listed.
3
Select “Set Details,” and press
ENTER.
5
Set “Series Recording” to “On,” and
press O RETURN.
6
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
The selected programme is set for
recording and appears in the Timer List.
The other programmes in the series will
be set for recording (appear in the Timer
List) as each previous recording is
completed.
(red): Indicates that the whole
programme is set to be recorded.
(grey): Indicates that the programme
is set to be recorded using Series
Recording.
• To modify the timer setting, see
page 59.
Recording (For Freeview)
b Notes
• This function cannot be used when the
broadcaster does not include series information
with the programme data.
• The timer recordings with “Series Recording”
set to “On” are recorded to the HDD.
4
About Split Programmes
Movies and other programmes that are split
into 2 or more parts are called Split
Programmes. If you set the timer for one part
of a Split Programme, the other parts that
start within 3 hours are automatically
recorded. For example, if the first half is set
to be recorded, the last half will be recorded
automatically.
To use this function, set “EPG Link” to “On”
(default) in step 4 above.
Press the red button.
The date, start and stop times,
programme position, recording mode,
etc., settings appear.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
55
To search for programmes related to the
timer settings (EPG Link)
When you set timer recording for a
programme that has series information, you
can search for related programmes such as
listed below.
To use this function, set “EPG Link” to “On”
(default) in step 4 above.
• Repeat programmes: You can search for
repeat broadcasts of the programme which
is set for timer recording (Alternate
Search).
• Programmes in a series: You can search for
the next programme in the series of a
programme which is set for timer
recording (Series Search).
• Recommended programmes: You can
search for recommended programmes
linked to the programme which is set for
timer recording (Recommendation
Search).
1
2
3
Press TIMER.
Select the timer setting, and press ,.
About EPG Link
The EPG Link function automatically
updates the date, start and stop times of timer
settings when the broadcaster changes them
and updates the EPG accordingly. For
example, if a programme with timer setting
starts before or ends after the scheduled
time, the timer setting is automatically
extended to record the whole programme.
To use the EPG Link function, set “EPG
Link” to “On” (default) in step 4 above.
b Notes
• Only the earliest part of the Split Programme is
displayed on the Timer List.
• When “EPG Link” is set to “On,” you cannot
change the date, start and stop time settings.
Setting the timer manually
(Manual)
1
The “Timer List” display appears.
When the following options appear in
the sub-menu, select an option, and
press ENTER.
“Alternate Search”: Searches for repeat
programmes.
“Series Search”: Searches for
programmes in a series.
“Recommendation Search”: Searches
for programmes recommended by
broadcaster as a link for current series.
To set the programme for recording,
follow the instructions for “Recording
TV programmes using the EPG”
(page 53) from step 2.
Press TIMER.
2
Select the “New Input” row, and
press ENTER.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
56
3
To make the detailed settings
1
Select “Set Details” in step 3 above, and
press ENTER.
The adjustable items are listed below.
“Pr/CH”: Sets the programme position.
An analogue programme can also be
selected.
“Date”: Sets the date (up to 30 days
later). Select a recording pattern by
pressing M repeatedly to set the timer
for the same daily or weekly
programmes.
“Start”: Sets the start time.
“Stop”: Sets the stop time.
“Extend”: Sets duration when a timer
recording is in progress. If the
programme set to be recorded daily or
weekly is extended, the manually
extended time set here will be added to
the subsequent timer recording times.
Note that when “VPS/PDC” is set to
“On,” you cannot make the “Extend”
setting.
• If you make a mistake, select the item
and change the setting.
2
Select an item using M/m and set using
</,.
“Record to”: Sets the recording
destination. If there is not enough
available DVD disc space for the
recording, the recorder automatically
records the programme to the HDD even
if you select “DVD” (Recovery
Recording).
“Recording Mode”: Sets the recording
mode (page 154).
“VPS/PDC”: Sets the VPS/PDC
function. See “About the VPS/PDC
function (For analogue broadcasting
only)” below.
“Update”: Sets the recorder
automatically replacing the previous
timer recording with the new one.
“Genre”: Sets the genre.
• (Models for the UK only) For details
about “EPG Link” and “Series
Recording,” see “Recording
programmes using Series Recording
(models for the UK only)” on page 55.
You cannot set these items to “On”
when setting the timer manually.
Select “OK,” and press ENTER.
The “Timer List” display appears.
The timer recording indicator lights up
on the front panel display and the
recorder is ready to start recording.
• To record a satellite programme, turn
on the satellite tuner and select the
satellite programme you want to
record. Leave the satellite tuner turned
on until the recorder finishes
recording.
• To modify the timer setting, see
page 59.
Recording (For Freeview)
4
Select an item using </, and
adjust using M/m. Then press
ENTER.
To enter a title name
Select “Set Title Name” in step 3 above, and
press ENTER (page 44).
About the VPS/PDC function (For
analogue broadcasting only)
To stop recording during timer recording
VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV
programmes in some broadcast systems.
These signals ensure that timer recordings
are made regardless of any broadcast delays,
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.
Press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.
To use the VPS/PDC function
Set “VPS/PDC” to “On” (see “To make the
detailed settings” on page 57).
When you turn on this function, the recorder
starts scanning the channels before the timer
recording starts.
z Hint
You can use the “Rec. Mode Adjust” function
(page 54).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
57
b Notes
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full
appears on the screen, change the recording
destination to “DVD,” or make available space
for the recording (page 83).
• Check that the clock is correctly set before
setting the timer recording. If not, the timer
recording cannot be made.
• Even if the timer is set for the same daily or
weekly programme, the timer recording cannot
be made if it overlaps with a programme that has
priority. “Overlap” will appear next to the
overlapped setting in the Timer List. Check the
priority order of the settings (page 59).
• Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot
be made while recording a programme that has
priority.
• The beginning of some recordings may not be
made when using the VPS/PDC function.
• The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works
with a timer recording and the VPS/PDC
function set to off. It does not function with
Quick Timer.
• The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO”
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”
Creating chapters in a title
The recorder can automatically divide a
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting
chapter marks. To select chapter mark
intervals or disable this function, see “Auto
Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter
(Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/
+RW)” in the “Recording” setup (page 136).
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can
edit chapter marks (page 85).
Using the Quick Timer function
You can set the recorder to record in 30minute increments.
Press z REC repeatedly to set the
duration.
Each press advances the time in 30-minute
increments. The maximum duration is six
hours.
(normal recording)
The time counter decreases minute by
minute to 0:00, then the recorder stops
recording (the power turns off).
To cancel the Quick Timer
Press z REC repeatedly until “0:00”
appears in the front panel display. The
recorder returns to normal recording mode.
To stop recording, press x REC STOP.
b Note
If you turn off the recorder during recording,
recording is stopped.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
58
Checking/Changing/
Cancelling Timer
Settings (Timer List)
“Recommendation Search” (models for
the UK only) (page 56)
To change or cancel the setting, repeat
steps 2 and 3 above.
When the timer settings overlap
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
You can check, change, or cancel the timer
settings using the Timer List.
1
Press TIMER.
The “Timer List” display appears.
When all of the timer settings are not
visible on the display, press M/m to view
the hidden timer settings.
2
Select the timer setting you want to
check/change/cancel, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3
Select an option, and press ENTER.
“Modify”:
Changes the timer setting.
Select an item using </, and adjust
using M/m. Select “OK” and press
ENTER.
z Hints
• For manual timer settings, you cannot modify
the timer setting for the current recording, but
you can extend the duration of the recording time
while recording (page 57).
For timer settings using the EPG, you can
modify the timer setting for the current recording
while recording, but you cannot extend the
duration of the recording (even when recording
is stopped).
(Models for the UK only) For timer settings
using the EPG, you can modify the timer setting
for the current recording while recording, and
extend the duration of the recording only when
“EPG Link” is set to “Off.”
• You can move to the first row/bottom row of the
Timer List using ./> while the list is
displayed.
Recording (For Freeview)
b Note
(Models for the UK only) To change the EPG
timer settings, set “EPG Link” to “Off” in “Set
Details.”
• The programme that starts first has priority
and the entire programme is recorded.
• After finishing the previous recording, the
other recording starts with several tens-ofsecond’s delay (when the end-time of one
recording and the start-time of another are
the same).
• When the recordings start at the same time,
only one of them will be recorded. Cancel
the timer setting for the programme that
you are not going to record.
b Notes
• When “VPS/PDC” is set to “On” for one or more
timer recordings, the start times may change in
the event of a broadcast delay or early start.
• Even if the timer is set, timer recordings cannot
be made while recording a programme that has
priority.
“Erase”:
Erases the timer setting.
Select “Yes” and press ENTER.
“Skip Once”:
Cancels the daily or weekly recordings
only once. After cancelling the timer
setting, “Skip Once” appears next to the
timer setting in the Timer List.
“Alternate Search” (models for the UK
only) (page 56)
“Series Search” (models for the UK
only) (page 56)
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
59
Recording from
Connected Equipment
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
You can record from a connected VCR or
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar
device, see “Connecting a VCR or Similar
Device” on page 34.
1
Press HDD or DVD.
If you select DVD, insert a recordable
DVD (see “1. Inserting a Disc” on
page 38).
2
Press INPUT to select an input source
according to the connection you
made.
The front panel display changes as
follows:
programme position
3
Select the desired audio signal when
recording a bilingual programme to
the HDD or DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode).
Set “External Audio” to “Bilingual” and
“Bilingual Recording” to “A/L” or “B/
R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 132).
4
Press REC MODE repeatedly to select
the recording mode.
For details about the recording mode,
see page 154.
5
Insert the source tape into the
connected equipment and set to
playback pause.
6
Press z REC.
7
Press the pause (or play) button on
the connected equipment to cancel
the playback pause status.
The connected equipment starts
playback and the playback image is
recorded by this recorder.
To stop recording, press x REC STOP
on this recorder.
If you connect a DV camcorder with a DV
IN jack
See “DV Camcorder Dubbing” on page 98.
If you connect an HDD camcorder with a
USB jack
See “HDD Camcorder Dubbing” on
page 94.
b Notes
• When recording a video game image, the screen
may not be clear.
• Any programme that contains a Copy-Never
copy guard signal cannot be recorded.
• When “Bilingual Recording” is set to “A/L” or
“B/R” in step 3, you cannot select the sound
when playing in the following cases.
– When recording to the HDD (“HDD
Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode Off”
in the “Recording” setup (page 137))/
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) in PCM mode.
– When recording to the HDD (“HDD
Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode On”
in the “Recording” setup (page 137))/
DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R
(Video mode).
• You cannot select “L1” in step 2 if “LINE 1 In”
is set to “Decoder” in the “Video In/Out” setup
(page 131).
This recorder starts recording.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
60
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue
broadcasting/in areas with GUIDE Plus+ only)
Viewing the GUIDE Plus+
Display
These are just a few of the ways to use the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
– Search for programmes by listing them
according to category (such as Movies or
Sport) or by using the Keyword Search
function (page 67).
– Once you have found the programme you
are looking for, use the GUIDE Plus+
system to set the timer for recording
(page 66).
– You can set the system to display your
favourite programmes according to
conditions that you set, such as category
and keyword (page 63).
b Note
The GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be used when
“Input Line System” is set to “NTSC” in the
“Basic” setup (page 125).
Blue button
Yellow button
GUIDE
INFO
</M/m/,,
ENTER
PAGE –
DAY –
PAGE +
DAY +
Press GUIDE.
The GUIDE Plus+ system “Home Screen”
appears.
A Video Window: This shows the
programme you were watching when
you pressed GUIDE.
B Action Bar: When the same colour
button on the remote is pressed, the
Action Bar functions. The Action Bar
function differs according to the
screen.
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting/in areas with GUIDE Plus+ only)
The GUIDE Plus+® system is a free
interactive programme guide. It displays up
to seven days of programme listings,
including programme titles, promotions, and
broadcast information. GUIDE Plus+ data
for the television programme listings are
carried by your local broadcast host channel
and are received through your aerial, set top
box receiver, or direct cable connection from
the wall.
Visit www.europe.guideplus.com for a list
of all European host channels.
Red button
Green button
C Information Box: Shows information
about the selected programme when
the “Home Screen” is displayed.
Contents will differ according to the
displayed screen.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
61
D Menu Bar: Press the blue button
(“Home”), and press M to move the
cursor to the Menu Bar. Then select
one of the following features using
</,, and press ENTER.
“Grid”: Shows the programmes for
the current time slot and next 7 days.
“Search”: Allows you to search for
titles by category or by keyword
(page 67). The displayed category
depends upon the programme data
received by this recorder. Movies,
Sport, and Children are examples of
possible categories.
“My TV”: Sets the profile for your
favourite programmes (page 63).
“Schedule”: Displays the list of timer
settings (page 71).
“Info”: Shows information when
available.
“Editor”: Allows you to edit the
channel lineup and channel display
(page 65).
“Setup”: Allows you to change the
language, country/region, postal code,
input source, or host channel.
Available buttons in the GUIDE Plus+
system “Home Screen”
E “Home” position: When you press the
blue button (“Home”), the cursor
returns to the last programme position
on the “Grid.”
• The Video Window is locked during recording
and the lock indicator appears in the Video
Window. You cannot unlock the Video Window
while recording.
• If you are watching programmes through a set
top box receiver, the Video Window may not
change as fast as you move the cursor. In this
case, lock the Video Window (page 62).
F Tiles: Shows the programme titles and
category; green (sports), purple
(movies), blue (children’s), teal
(others).
Select a programme using </M/m/
,, and press ENTER to watch the
programme.
Buttons
Operations
Blue button
(“Home”)
Returns to the “Home”
position on the “Grid.”
GUIDE
Closes the GUIDE Plus+
system.
PAGE +/–
Changes the programme list
by page.
DAY +/–
Changes the programme list
by day.
INFO
Shows information about the
selected programme.
To unlock the Video Window
The Video Window is locked so that it does
not change programme positions when you
move the cursor across other titles.
From “Grid,” select the logo of the
programme position that is locked, and press
the red button (“Unlock”). “ ” changes to
“ ” and the Video Window is unlocked. To
lock the Video Window, select the logo of
the programme position you want to lock
and press the red button (“Lock”).
b Notes
G Broadcast station Logo: Shows the
broadcast station logo.
H Time Slot: Indicates the currently
selected time slot. Use </, to
select a different time slot.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
62
Listing Up Your
Favourite Programme
Information (My TV)
5
Press GUIDE.
3
Select “My TV” using </,.
Press M to move the cursor to the
Menu Bar.
“My TV”
4
Press the yellow button (“Profile”).
6
Press ENTER.
To change the profile settings
Repeat from step 3 above.
To select and watch a programme from
“My TV”
1
After step 3 above, press ENTER.
The programmes that match the profile
conditions are displayed.
2
Select a programme using </M/m/,,
and press ENTER.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting/in areas with GUIDE Plus+ only)
“Channels”: Select the programme
position using </M/m/,, and press
ENTER. To add more programme
positions, press the yellow button
(“Add”). You can register up to 16
programme positions.
To cancel the registration, select a
programme position, and press the red
button (“Delete”).
“Categories”: Select the category using
</M/m/,, and press ENTER. To add
more categories, press the yellow button
(“Add”). You can register up to 4
categories.
To cancel the registration, select a
category, and press the red button
(“Delete”).
“Keywords”: Enter a keyword. See “To
search for a programme by keyword” on
page 67. To add more keywords, press
the yellow button (“Add”). You can
register up to 16 keywords.
To cancel the registration, select a
keyword, and press the red button
(“Delete”).
You can set a profile and list up only your
favourite programme information.
1
2
Select “Channels,” “Categories,” or
“Keywords,” and press the yellow
button (“Add”).
63
Making Changes to the
GUIDE Plus+ System
7
Wait for one day until the programme
guide data can be received.
If the programme guide data has not
been received after waiting for a day,
search for the host channel at the
following website and set the host
channel manually (“Changing the
GUIDE Plus+ host channel manually
(Setup)” (page 64)).
www.europe.guideplus.com
You can customize the GUIDE Plus+
system. If the host channel has been changed
or moved, and the programme guide data
cannot be received, you can resolve the
problem by following the steps below.
Searching for the GUIDE Plus+
host channel (Setup)
Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host
channel manually (Setup)
The default host channel setting is set to
“Automatic,” so you should not have to
change the host channel setting. However, if
the host channel has changed or moved,
update the host channel setting.
If the set top box receiver is connected to the
recorder using a SCART cord only
(page 20), see “Changing the GUIDE Plus+
host channel manually (Setup)” on page 64.
If the set top box receiver is connected to the
recorder using a SCART cord only and you
want to receive the programme guide data
from your set top box receiver, search for the
host channel on the following website and
set it for your area, following the steps
below:
www.europe.guideplus.com
1
2
Press GUIDE.
3
Select “Setup” using </,.
1
Press M to move the cursor to the
Menu Bar.
After step 4 of “Searching for the
GUIDE Plus+ host channel (Setup),”
press the yellow button (“Change”)
twice.
“Manual” appears.
The GUIDE Plus+ setup menu appears.
“Setup”
4
Select “Host Channel Setup” using
M/m, and press ENTER.
5
6
Press the yellow button (“Reset”).
Press [/1 to turn off the recorder.
2
3
Select “Source” using ,.
4
5
Select “Prog. No.” using ,.
6
Press the green button (“Save”).
Press the yellow button (“Source”)
repeatedly to select the input source.
Enter the programme position
number using the number buttons.
The display asks for confirmation.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
64
7
Select “Confirm” using </,, and
press ENTER.
6
The display returns to the GUIDE Plus+
setup menu.
8
Select the programme position you
want to check using M/m.
To change the input source, press the red
button (“Source”).
To change the programme position,
press the green button (“Prog. No.”),
then enter a programme position number
using the number buttons, and press
ENTER.
Wait one day until the programme
guide data can be received.
To cancel the settings
Press the red button (“Back”).
To check the GUIDE Plus+ system
information
Select “Setup” in the Menu Bar, and
press ENTER.
2
Select “GUIDE Plus+ system
Information” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
b Note
The GUIDE Plus+ system is reset when you make
changes to the host channel settings.
Checking programme
positions (Editor)
Check whether programme position
numbers are the same as the programme
position numbers set in the “Analog Tuner”
setup.
If you want to make adjustments to the
channel settings or change the channel
name, see “Aerial Reception Settings
(Analog Tuner)” (page 127).
Disabling programme
positions (Editor)
If any programme positions are unused or
contain unwanted channels, you can hide
them.
1
After step 4 of “Checking programme
positions (Editor),” in the left
column, select the programme
position you want to hide or display
using M/m.
2
Press the red button (“On/Off”).
The disabled positions will turn grey.
To show the disabled positions, press
the red button (“On/Off”) again.
b Notes
1
2
Press GUIDE.
3
Select “Editor” using </,.
Press M to move the cursor to the
Menu Bar.
• You cannot record a programme position if it is
not set in “Aerial Reception Settings (Analog
Tuner)” (page 127) even if it is set to “On” in the
“Editor” in the Menu Bar.
• If you are using your set top box receiver to
receive programmes (when the set top box
receiver is connected to the recorder using a
SCART cord only, page 20) and are able to
receive the same programme with both the set
top box receiver and the recorder, change the
“Source” to receive the programme with the
recorder’s tuner.
GUIDE Plus+ (For analogue broadcasting/in areas with GUIDE Plus+ only)
1
z Hint
To receive from the recorder a programme
position that can be received by either the set top
box receiver or the recorder, change the input
source in step 6.
“Editor”
4
5
Press ENTER.
Press , to move the cursor to the
right column.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
65
Recording (For analogue
broadcasting)
Timer Recording (GUIDE
Plus+/Manual)
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
Red button
Green button
+R
TIMER
</M/m/,,
ENTER
You can set the timer for a total of 32
programmes (8 programmes when using the
VPS/PDC function), up to 30 days in
advance.
Methods to set the timer include:
• One Button Recording (GUIDE Plus+
system)
• Setting the timer manually (GUIDE Plus+
system)
Before you start recording…
• Check that the disc has enough available
space for the recording (page 43). For the
HDD, DVD+RWs, and DVD-RWs, you
can free up disc space by erasing titles
(page 82).
• Adjust the recording picture quality if
necessary (page 120).
• Turn on the set top box receiver and
connect the set top box controller, when
the recorder is connected to a set top box
receiver and you want to record using the
GUIDE Plus+ system.
Yellow button
GUIDE
z REC
x REC
STOP
One Button Recording (GUIDE
Plus+ (in areas with GUIDE
Plus+ service only))
You can use the GUIDE Plus+ system to set
the timer to record a programme up to seven
days in advance.
1
Press GUIDE.
2
Select a programme using </M/m/
,.
b Note
Do not operate your set top box receiver just
before or during a timer recording. This may
prevent the accurate recording of a programme.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
66
3
Press the red button (“Record”) or
z REC.
4
Press the yellow button (“Add”).
The display for entering characters
appears.
5
Select a character on the keyboard using
</M/m/,, and press ENTER.
To switch between upper-case, lowercase, or characters with accents, press
the yellow button (“Keyboard”)
repeatedly.
To cancel entering a new keyword, press
the red button (“Back”).
6
7
Repeat step 5 to enter the keyword.
8
Select a keyword using M/m, and press
ENTER.
Programmes that contain the keyword in
the programme’s title and in the
programme’s Information Box are
listed.
Select a programme using M/m, and
press ENTER.
The set programme and Time Slot
change colour and the recorder is ready
to start recording. When recording from
a set top box receiver, be sure to turn it
on.
Unlike a VCR, there is no need to turn
off the recorder before the timer
recording starts.
To search for a programme by category
Press M to move the cursor to the Menu
Bar while the GUIDE Plus+ system
“Home Screen” is displayed.
2
Select “Search” using </,, and press
ENTER.
“Search”
3
4
5
Select a category using </,.
Select a sub-category using M/m, and
press ENTER.
Programmes that meet the conditions
are listed.
The sub-categories differ according to
country/region.
Select a programme using M/m, and
press ENTER.
To search for a programme by keyword
Press the green button (“Save”).
The entered keyword is registered.
To delete the keyword, select the
keyword you want to delete, and press
the red button (“Delete”).
To change the keyword, select the
keyword you want to change, and press
the green button (“Edit”).
1
Press M to move the cursor to the Menu
Bar while the GUIDE Plus+ system
“Home Screen” is displayed.
9
2
Select “Search” using </,, and press
ENTER.
3
Select “My Choice” using </,.
When you have already entered
keywords, go to step 8.
To enter a new keyword, go to step 4.
z Hint
When two or more keywords are set for “My
Choice,” you can select “All” for sub-category.
Recording (For analogue broadcasting)
1
To select a programme position quickly
using the TV broadcast station logo
1
Press the yellow button (“Channels”)
while the GUIDE Plus+ system “Home
Screen” is displayed.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
67
2
Select the TV broadcast station logo
using </M/m/,, and press ENTER.
The display returns to “Grid” and the
programme currently being broadcast
by the selected TV station is selected.
3
Select a programme using </,, and
press ENTER.
Setting the timer manually
(Schedule)
1
Press TIMER.
The schedule list appears.
2
Press the green button (“Manual”).
3
Set the yellow-highlighted date using
the number buttons and </M/m/,.
Then press the green button
(“Next”).
To confirm, change, or cancel a timer
recording
See “Checking/Changing/Cancelling Timer
Settings (Schedule)” on page 71.
To stop recording during timer recording
Press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.
Rec. Mode Adjust
If there is not enough available disc space for
the recording, the recorder automatically
adjusts the recording mode to enable the
entire programme to be recorded. Set “Rec.
Mode Adjust” to “On” in the “Recording”
setup (page 135).
z Hint
When you select “AUTO” for the recording mode,
the recorder automatically maximises the
recording quality for the space available on the
inserted disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to
a blank DVD disc (if recording to HDD).
b Notes
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full
appears on the screen, change the recording
destination to “DVD,” or make available space
for the recording (page 83).
• The last recording mode you selected manually
becomes the default recording mode for timer
recordings made from the GUIDE Plus+ system.
• You cannot adjust the recording quality (HDD or
DVD) once the recording starts.
• The beginning of some recordings may not be
made when using the VPS/PDC function.
• You cannot extend the recording duration time
when “VPS/PDC” is selected (page 69).
• The “Rec. Mode Adjust” function only works
with a timer recording to DVD, and the VPS/
PDC function set to off.
• The recording mode cannot be set to “AUTO”
when “VPS/PDC” is set to “On.”
Date
4
Set the start time using the number
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press
the green button (“Next”).
5
Set the stop time using the number
buttons and </M/m/,. Then press
the green button (“Next”).
6
Select the input source using M/m,
and select the programme position
using the number buttons or M/m.
7
Press the green button (“Next”).
The display for entering characters
appears. You can change the title name,
if necessary.
8
Press the green button (“Save”).
The date, start and stop times,
programme position, etc. settings
appear.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
68
9
Press the corresponding colour
button repeatedly to set the recording
quality, frequency, or destination.
z Hint
You can use the “Rec. Mode Adjust” function
(page 68).
• Yellow button (“Destination”): Sets
the recording destination. If there is
not enough available DVD disc space
for the recording, the recorder
automatically records the programme
to the HDD even if you select “DVD”
(Recovery Recording). When you set a
daily or weekly timer, “HDDr” allows
you to replace the previous timer
recording with the new one
automatically (HDD only).
• Green button (“Frequency”): Selects
the recording pattern.
• Red button (“Quality”): Selects the
recording mode (page 154).
b Notes
press the corresponding colour
button repeatedly to set the duration
or genre.
• Green button (“Timing”): Selects the
duration time or to set the VPS/PDC
function. See “About the VPS/PDC
function” below.
• Yellow button (“Genre”): Selects a
particular HDD genre, if necessary.
About the VPS/PDC function
VPS/PDC signals are transmitted with TV
programmes in some broadcast systems.
These signals ensure that timer recordings
are made regardless of any broadcast delays,
early starts, or broadcast interruptions.
To use the VPS/PDC function
Select “VPS / PDC” in step 10 above.
When you turn on this function, the recorder
starts scanning the channels before the timer
recording starts.
b Note
If a message indicating that the HDD is full
appears on the screen, change the recording
destination to “DVD,” or make available space for
the recording (page 83).
11 Press GUIDE to exit the GUIDE Plus+
system.
The recorder is ready to start recording.
• To modify the timer setting such as the
VPS/PDC function, see page 71.
Recording (For analogue broadcasting)
10 Press , to display “Timing,” then
• If a message indicating that the HDD is full
appears on the screen, change the recording
destination to “DVD,” or make available space
for the recording (page 83).
• When you set the recording destination to
“HDDr,” the previous timer recording will be
replaced with the new one even if you have not
watched it.
Using the Quick Timer function
You can set the recorder to record in 30minute increments.
For details, see page 58.
To stop recording during timer recording
Press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case, follow
the on-screen instructions.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
69
Recording stereo and bilingual
programmes
The recorder automatically receives and
records stereo and bilingual programmes
based on the ZWEITON system or the
NICAM system.
The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format”
is set to “Video Mode Off” in the
“Recording” setup (page 137)) and a DVDRW (VR mode) or DVD-R (VR mode) can
record both main and sub sounds. You can
switch between main and sub when playing
the disc.
The HDD (when “HDD Recording Format”
is set to “Video Mode On” in the
“Recording” setup (page 137)) and a
DVD+RW, DVD+R, DVD-RW (Video
mode), or DVD-R (Video mode) can record
only one sound track (main or sub) at a time.
Creating chapters in a title
The recorder can automatically divide a
recording (a title) into chapters by inserting
chapter marks. To select chapter mark
intervals or disable this function, see “Auto
Chapter (HDD/VR),” “Auto Chapter
(Video),” or “Auto Chapter (DVD+R/
+RW)” in the “Recording” setup (page 136).
When recording to the HDD, a DVD-R (VR
mode) or a DVD-RW (VR mode), you can
edit chapter marks (page 85).
Before recording starts, set “Bilingual
Recording” to “A/L” (default) or “B/R” in
the “Audio In” setup (page 132).
About HDD Recording format, see
page 137.
ZWEITON (German stereo) system
When a stereo-based programme is
received, “Stereo” appears.
When a bilingual ZWEITON-based
programme is received, “L,” “R,” or “L+R”
appears.
NICAM system
To record a NICAM programme, be sure to
set “NICAM Select” to “NICAM” (default)
in the “Audio In” setup. If the sound is not
clear when listening to NICAM broadcasts,
set “NICAM Select” to “Standard”
(page 132).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
70
Checking/Changing/
Cancelling Timer
Settings (Schedule)
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
4
In the left column, select an item
using the red button (“Back”) or the
green button (“Next”), and adjust
using the number buttons or </M/m/
,.
5
Press the corresponding colour
button repeatedly to change settings.
+R
You can change or cancel timer settings
using the schedule list.
Checking/changing timer
settings
1
Press TIMER.
The schedule list appears.
6
7
2
3
Press the green button (“Edit”).
Press the green button (“Timing”)
repeatedly to change the duration
time or to set the VPS/PDC function.
See “About the VPS/PDC function” on
page 69.
• If you want to record to a particular
HDD genre, press the yellow button
(“Genre”) repeatedly.
Select the timer setting you want to
change using m.
You can check the selected timer setting
highlighted in pink.
To change the setting, go to step 3.
If not changing the setting, go to step 6.
Press , to display “Timing.”
8
Recording (For analogue broadcasting)
• To change the recording destination,
press the yellow button
(“Destination”). If there is not enough
available DVD disc space for the
recording, the recorder automatically
records the programme to the HDD
even if you select “DVD” (Recovery
Recording). When you set a daily or
weekly timer, “HDDr” allows you to
replace the previous timer recording
with the new one automatically (HDD
only).
• To set the recording pattern, press the
green button (“Frequency”).
• To change the recording mode, press
the red button (“Quality”) (page 154).
Press GUIDE to exit the GUIDE Plus+
system.
The new settings become effective.
Cancelling timer settings
In step 2 of “Checking/changing timer
settings,” select the timer setting you
want to cancel using M/m, and press the
red button (“Delete”).
To close the schedule list
Press GUIDE.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
71
When the timer settings overlap
• The programme that starts first has priority
and the entire programme is recorded.
• After finishing the previous recording, the
other recording starts with several tens-ofsecond’s delay (when the end-time of one
recording and the start-time of another are
the same).
• When the recordings start at the same time,
only one of them will be recorded. Cancel
the timer setting for the programme that
you are not going to record.
Recording from
Connected Equipment
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
+R
You can record from a connected VCR or
similar device. To connect a VCR or similar
device, see “Connecting a VCR or Similar
Device” on page 34.
For details, see page 60.
b Note
When “VPS / PDC” is set for one or more timer
recordings, the start times may change in the event
of a broadcast delay or early start.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
72
-RWVR -RWVideo
3
Playback
Playback starts from the selected title.
Playing
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
Select a title using M/m, and press
ENTER.
-RWVR -RWVideo
DVD
VCD
+R
z Hint
You can also use the H button in step 3 to start
playback.
CD
b Note
DATA DVD DATA CD
When any video titles are recorded on a DATA
DVD, the MP3 audio tracks on that DATA DVD
cannot be played.
HDD
DVD
When you play a DVD VIDEO, or a
finalised DVD+RW, DVD-RW (Video
mode), DVD+R, or DVD-R (Video mode),
you can display the disc’s menu by pressing
TOP MENU or MENU.
AUDIO
SUBTITLE
ANGLE
TITLE LIST
/
>
H/X/x
PLAY
MODE
1
Press HDD or DVD.
• If you select DVD, insert a disc (see
“1. Inserting a Disc” on page 38).
• If you insert a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO
CD, DATA DVD or DATA CD, press
H. Playback starts.
2
Press TITLE LIST.
If the Title List is already displayed, skip
this step.
Example: HDD
b Note
The H button is not available in the disc’s menu.
To play VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs with
PBC functions
Playback
</M/m/,,
ENTER
.
To use the DVD’s Menu
PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play
VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs
interactively using the menu on your TV
screen.
When you start playing a VIDEO CD/Super
VIDEO CD with PBC functions, the menu
appears.
Select an item using the number buttons, and
press ENTER. Then, follow the instructions
in the menu (press H when “Press
SELECT” appears).
b Note
Some playback options such as search, repeat play
or programme play cannot be played with PBC
function. To play with playback options, start
playback without PBC functions using the Title
List.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
73
To play DivX video files or audio tracks in
a disc containing both file types
1
Press < while the Title List (DVD/CD)
is displayed.
2
Select “Data Format” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
3
Select “CD,” “MP3” or “DivX” using
M/m, and press ENTER.
4
Return to the Title List, then select an
album, title or track, and press ENTER
or H.
To stop playback
Press x.
To resume playback from the point where
you stopped (Resume Play)
When you press H again after you stop
playback, the recorder resumes playback
from the point where you pressed x.
To start from the beginning, press x again,
and press H. Playback starts from the
beginning of the title/track/scene.
To play restricted DVDs (Parental Lock)
If you play a restricted DVD, the display for
entering your password appears on your TV
screen.
Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
The recorder starts playback.
To register or change the password, see
“Limitation Settings (Parental Lock)” on
page 138.
One-Touch Play (for SCART/HDMI
connections only)
Press H. With one touch of the H button,
the recorder and your TV automatically turn
on and the TV’s input is switched to the
recorder. Playback starts automatically.
b Notes
• When using the HDMI connection, there may be
a delay, before the playback picture appears on
the TV screen, and the beginning portion of the
playback picture may not be displayed.
• To use the One-Touch Play function, set
“Control for HDMI” to “On” (default) in the
“HDMI Output” setup (page 140).
b Notes
• You cannot resume playback during TV Pause.
• Resume Play is not available for Super VIDEO
CDs.
• The point where you stopped playing is cleared
from memory when:
– you open the disc tray (except HDD).
– you play another title (except HDD).
– you start playback using the Title List (except
HDD).
– you edit the title after stopping playback.
– you change the settings on the recorder.
– you make a recording (except HDD).
– you disconnect the mains lead.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
74
Playback options
To check the position of the buttons below, see the illustration on page 73.
Buttons
Operations
ANGLE
Changes the angles for a scene when pressed during playback.
When the disc has various angles (multi-angles) recorded,
“
” appears on the screen.
DVD
To switch the angle mark indicator to off, set “Angle Indicator”
to “Off” in the “Playback” setup (page 138).
AUDIO
HDD -RWVR
-RVR
DVD
CD
VCD
DATA DVD DATA CD
Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed
repeatedly in normal playback mode.
DVD
DATA DVD
HDD
-RWVR
*1
DATA CD
DVD
DATA CD
: Selects stereo or
DivX video file only
MP3 audio track only
Playback
SUBTITLE
: Selects the language.
-RVR : Selects the main or sub sound.
*2
*2
VCD
CD DATA DVD
monaural audio tracks.
*1
*2
*1
Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly.
DATA DVD * DATA CD *
* DivX video file only
/
(instant replay/
instant advance)
HDD
+RW
-RWVideo
+R
-RVideo
DVD
-RWVR
-RVR
DATA DVD *
DATA CD *
* DivX video file only
. (previous)/
> (next)
Each time you press
, replays the scene for the following
duration.
5 seconds t 15 seconds t 30 seconds t 1 minute t
2 minutes t 3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t
20 minutes t advances the time in 10-minute increments t
2 hours
Each time you press
, briefly fast forwards the current scene
for the following duration.
30 seconds t 1 minute t 1 minute 30 seconds t 2 minutes
t 3 minutes t 5 minutes t 10 minutes t 20 minutes t
advances the time in 10-minute increments t 2 hours
Goes to the beginning of the previous/next title/chapter/scene/
track when pressed during playback.
Goes to the beginning of the first title/track when pressed in stop
mode.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
75
Buttons
Operations
(fast reverse/fast forward)
Fast reverses/fast forwards the disc when pressed during
playback.
Search speed changes as follows:
fast reverse fast forward
mFR1*1 T t MFF1*2
mFR2 T T t t MFF2
mFR3*3 T T T t t t MFF3*3
mFR4*3 T T T T t t t t MFF4*3
When you press and hold the button, fast forward/fast reverse
continues at the selected speed until you release the button.
*1
When you press m once during playback, you can play Reverse
play (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs/DivX
video files/audio tracks).
*2 When you press M once during playback, you can play quickly
with sound (Scan Audio) (not available for VIDEO CDs/Super
VIDEO CDs).
*3 Not available for VIDEO CDs/Super VIDEO CDs/audio tracks.
To resume normal playback, press H.
Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in
pause mode.
Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode.
To resume normal playback, press H.
(slow, freeze frame)
HDD
+RW
-RWVR
-RWVideo
+R
-RVR
-RVideo
DVD
VCD
DATA DVD
*1
*2
*1*2
DATA CD
*1
*1*2
Playback direction only
DivX video file only
X (pause)
Pauses playback.
To resume normal playback, press H.
b Notes
• Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with
titles recorded on this recorder.
• JPEG image files made with a DVD camcorder
can only be played as a slideshow. For video
files containing JPEG image files and movies,
the recorder can play movie parts only.
Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound
track
DTS audio signals are output only through the
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack.
When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set
“DTS Output” to “On” in the “Audio Out” setup
(page 133).
Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a
CD
• When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive
noise will be heard from the LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/
DECODER/LINE 2 OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks.
To avoid possible damage to the audio system,
the user should take proper precautions when the
LINE 3-TV/LINE 1/DECODER/LINE 2 OUT
(R-AUDIO-L) jacks of the recorder are
connected to an amplification system. To enjoy
DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external
DTS decoder must be connected to the
DIGITAL OUT jack of the recorder.
• Set the sound to “Stereo” using the AUDIO
button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD
(page 75).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
76
Playing a specific portion
repeatedly (A-B Repeat)
1
Press PLAY MODE during playback.
For audio tracks on a CD, press ,
while the Title List is displayed, and
select “Play Mode.”
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)
You can repeatedly play all the titles/tracks/
files or a single title/chapter/track on the
HDD, a disc or an album.
1
For audio tracks on a DATA DVD/
DATA CD/CD, press , while the Title
List is displayed, and select “Play
Mode.”
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
Select “A-B Repeat,” and press
ENTER.
“Set point A” is selected.
2
3
While monitoring the sound, press
ENTER at the starting point (point A)
of the portion to be played
repeatedly.
Continue playing to locate the ending
point (point B), and press ENTER.
A-B Repeat starts.
To cancel A-B Repeat
*1
*2
DivX video file only
Available only when playing without PBC
functions
*3 Audio tracks only
Press CLEAR. Or, set “A-B Repeat” to
“Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.
b Notes
• When playing an HDD/DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW
(Video mode)/DVD-R (Video mode), set the
start and stop points within the same title.
• “A-B Repeat” is not available for MP3 audio
tracks.
Select an item to be repeated using
M/m.
“Repeat Title” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA
DVDs*1/DATA CDs*1): repeats the
current title.
“Repeat Chapter” (for HDD/DVDs):
repeats the current chapter.
“Repeat Track” (for VIDEO CDs*2/
CDs/DATA DVDs/DATA CDs):
repeats the current track.
“Repeat Programme”: repeats the
current programme (page 78).
“Repeat Disc” (for VIDEO CDs*2/
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)/CDs/
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs): repeats the
entire disc.
“Repeat Album” (for DATA DVDs*3/
DATA CDs*3): repeats the current
album.
“Set point B” is selected.
4
Select “Repeat,” and press ENTER.
Playback
3
Press PLAY MODE during playback.
4
Press ENTER.
Repeat play starts.
To cancel Repeat play
Press CLEAR. Or, set “Repeat” to “Repeat
Off” in the “Play Mode” menu.
b Note
You can select “Repeat Programme” only during
Programme play.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
77
Creating your own programme
(Programme)
*1
-RVideo *1 VCD
HDD -RWVideo
DATA DVD
*1
*2
*2
DATA CD
CD
*2
To programme other chapters or
tracks, press </M/m/, to select a
step number, and repeat steps 4 and
5.
7
Press H.
Programme play starts.
finalised disc only
MP3 audio tracks only
You can play the contents of the HDD or a
disc in the order you want by arranging the
order of the titles/chapters/albums/tracks on
the HDD or disc to create your own
programme. You can make a programme of
up to 24 chapters/tracks, etc.
1
6
To stop Programme play
Press x (stop).
To cancel Programme play
Press CLEAR during playback. Or, set
“Programme” to “Cancel Programme Play”
in the “Play Mode” menu.
Press PLAY MODE during playback.
To erase the programme
For audio tracks on a DATA DVD/
DATA CD/CD, press , while the Title
List is displayed, and select “Play
Mode.”
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
Press CLEAR in stop mode. Or, set
“Programme” to “Erase Programme List” in
the “Play Mode” menu.
2
Select “Programme,” and press
ENTER.
3
Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and
press ENTER.
The “Input/Edit Programme” display
differs depending upon the disc type.
Example: DVD
4
Select a title or album (example: Title
01) using M/m, and press ,.
5
Select a chapter or track (example:
Chapter 001) using M/m, and press
ENTER.
z Hints
• The programme you made remains after
Programme play finishes. To play the same
programme again, set “Programme” to “Start
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.
However, the programme is cleared after you
remove the disc or press [/1.
• You can repeat Programme play. During
Programme play, set “Repeat” to “Repeat
Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu
(page 77).
The chapter or track is programmed.
If you make a mistake, select the step
number (example: 01.) using </M/m,
and press CLEAR.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
78
b Notes
Advanced Playback
Functions
Pausing a TV broadcast (TV
Pause/Pause Live TV)
HDD
1
While viewing a TV broadcast, press
TV PAUSE.
The picture pauses, and the recorder
starts recording the current TV channel
to the HDD.
It may take up to 10 seconds to start
recording.
2
Press H to resume watching the
programme.
You can fast forward/fast reverse,
pause, or stop the programme using
m/M, X and x without affecting
the recording.
3
Playback
You can pause a current TV broadcast, and
record it on the HDD, then continue
watching the programme at a later time. This
is useful when you receive an unexpected
phone call or visitor while watching TV.
When connecting the recorder to your TV
using the SCART jack, do the following.
– set “SMARTLINK” to “This Recorder
Only” in the “Options” setup (page 141).
– set “TV Pause” to “TV’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 142).
– preset programme positions by
downloading from your TV using
“Download from TV” of “Auto Channel
Setting” in the “Analog Tuner” setup
(page 127).
If you do not make the SCART connection,
set “TV Pause” to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 142).
• The picture does not pause and the recorder
starts only recording in the following cases.
– when the programme positions are preset
differently between the recorder and the
connected TV.
– when watching the programme from the
external equipment connected to your TV.
• The picture tuned by the recorder pauses when
“TV Pause” is set to “Recorder’s Tuner” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 142).
• You may not be able to use the “TV Pause”
function depending on some TVs. For details,
refer to the operating instructions supplied with
your TV.
• The “TV Pause” function will not work correctly
when watching TV via the connected component
such as a VCR or digital tuner. The “TV Pause”
function works only with the channel selected on
the TV.
• You cannot use the “TV Pause” function as a
recording feature from the component (VCR,
etc.) connected to the LINE 1/DECODER jack.
• The “TV Pause” function will not work if the
connected TV does not comply with
SMARTLINK. To check whether your TV
complies with SMARTLINK, refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your TV.
Playing from the beginning of
the programme you are
recording (Chase Play)
HDD
“Chase Play” allows you to view the
recorded part of a programme on the HDD
while the recording is being made. You do
not need to wait until the recording finishes.
Press H while recording.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
programme you are recording.
When you fast forward to the point that you
are recording, “Chase Play” returns to
normal playback.
Press x REC STOP to stop recording.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
79
Playing a previous recording
while making another
(Simultaneous Rec and Play)
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
DVD
+R
VCD DATA DVD
DATA CD
“Simultaneous Rec and Play” allows you to
view a previously recorded programme
while recording programmes. Playback
continues even if a timer recording starts.
Use this function as follows:
• While recording to the HDD:
Play another title on the HDD.
Play a previously recorded programme on
a DVD by pressing the DVD button.
• While recording to a DVD:
Play a previously recorded programme on
the HDD by pressing the HDD button.
You can also play a DVD VIDEO, VIDEO
CD, Super VIDEO CD, DATA DVD, or
DATA CD while recording on the HDD.
Searching for a Time/
Title/Chapter/Track,
etc.
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
DATA CD
While recording, press TITLE LIST to
display the HDD Title List.
2
Select the title you want to play, and
press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected title.
While recording, press DVD and insert
the DVD into the recorder.
2
Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD
Title List.
3
Select the title you want to play, and
press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected title.
b Note
You cannot play a DVD, DivX video or VIDEO
CD recorded in the NTSC colour system while
recording on the HDD in the PAL/SECAM colour
system.
*
You can search a disc by title, chapter, scene
or track. As titles and tracks are assigned
individual numbers, select the title or track
by entering its number. You can also search
for a scene using the time code.
1
Press PLAY MODE during playback.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
2
Select “Search Mode,” and press
ENTER.
3
Select a search method, and press
ENTER.
“Time Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA
DVDs*1/DATA CDs*1/VIDEO
CDs*2*3): Searches for a starting point
by entering the time code.
“Title Search” (for HDD/DVDs/DATA
DVDs*1/DATA CDs*1)
“Chapter Search” (for HDD/DVDs)
“Track Search” (for VIDEO CDs*3)
*1
*2
*3
Example: Play a DVD while recording to
the HDD.
1
DivX video file only
Except Super VIDEO CDs
Available only when playing without PBC
functions
The display for entering the number
appears.
4
Press the number buttons to select
the number of the title, chapter, time
code, etc., you want.
For example: Time Search
To find a scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes,
and 20 seconds, enter “21020.”
If you make a mistake, select another
number.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
80
DVD
* DivX video file only
Example: Play another title on the HDD
while recording to the HDD.
1
+R
*
VCD DATA DVD
-RWVR -RWVideo
5
Press ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected
number.
z Hint
You can search for a title/track/chapter by entering
the title/track/chapter number using the number
buttons during playback.
Playback
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
81
Erasing and Editing
Before Editing
This recorder offers various edit options for
various disc types.
b Notes
• You may lose the edited contents if you remove
the disc or a timer recording starts while editing.
• DVD discs created by DVD camcorders cannot
be edited on this recorder.
• If a message appears and indicates that the disc’s
control information is full, erase or edit
unnecessary titles.
• The remaining disc space displayed on the
screen may differ from the actual remaining disc
space.
• When editing a DVD+R or DVD-R, finish all
editing before finalising the disc. You cannot
edit a finalised disc.
To open up disc space
To open up disc space on a DVD+RW or
DVD-RW (Video mode), erase the title with
the largest number in the title list.
Largest title number
To switch between the Playlist and
Original Title List (DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR
mode only)
You can display the Playlist titles in the Title
List (Playlist), or the Original titles in the
Title List (Original).
1
Press < while the Title List is
displayed.
2
Select “Play List” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
3
Select “Original” or “Play List” using
M/m, and press ENTER.
About editing accuracy
When editing the titles recorded on the
HDD, you can select the type of editing.
“Video Mode Compatible Editing”:
Recommended if you are going to dub the
titles to DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (Video mode)
or DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs afterward by Highspeed dubbing. The editing points and
chapter marks may be slightly different from
those you selected.
“Frame Accurate Editing”:
Recommended when you want to edit titles
precisely. However, the editing points may
be slightly different from the point you
selected when you dub the titles by Highspeed dubbing.
To open up disc space on the HDD or a
DVD-RW (VR mode), you can erase any
title.
See “Erasing and Editing a Title” on
page 83.
For DVD-Rs and DVD+Rs, the available
disc space does not increase even if you
erase titles.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
82
“Create”: Creates a Playlist (page 87).
“Undo”: Undoes the last edit you made.
Erasing and Editing a
Title
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
This section explains the basic edit
functions. Note that editing is irreversible.
To edit DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode)
without changing the original recordings,
create a Playlist title (page 87).
1
Press TITLE LIST.
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode,
switch the Title List (Original or
Playlist), if necessary.
2
Select a title, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3
z Hint
You can label or re-label DVDs (page 45).
Editing multiple titles (MultiMode)
HDD
You can select and edit up to 24 titles at one
time.
1
2
Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3
Select an option, and press ENTER.
Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
ENTER.
The display for selecting titles to be
edited appears.
4
Erasing and Editing
You can make the following edits to the
title.
“Erase”: Erases the selected title. Select
“Yes” when asked for confirmation.
“Edit”: Allows you to make the
following edits.
• “Title Name”: Allows you to enter or
re-enter a title name (page 44).
• “Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s
thumbnail picture that appears in the
Title List (page 42).
• “A-B Erase”: Erases a section of the
title (page 84).
• “Divide”: Divides a title into two titles
(page 84).
• “Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters in a title
(page 85).
• “Set Genre”: Assigns a genre to a title.
• “Protect”: Protects the title. “ ”
appears next to the protected title.
• “Move”: Changes the title’s playing
order (page 87).
• “Combine”: Combines two titles into
one (page 87).
“Genre Name”: Allows you to enter a
genre name (up to 12 characters)
(page 44).
“Multi-Mode”: Allows you to select and
edit multiple titles at one time (page 83).
Press TITLE LIST.
Select a title, and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box.
To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
5
Repeat step 4 to select all of the titles
you want to edit.
6
When you finish selecting titles,
press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
7
Select an option, and press ENTER.
“Erase”: Erases the selected titles.
“Protect”: Protects the titles. “ ”
appears next to the protected title.
“Unprotected”: Unprotects the titles.
“Change Genre”: Changes the genre of
the titles.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
83
z Hint
You can exit “Multi-Mode” by pressing , and
selecting “Single-Mode” while selecting titles.
Erasing a section of a title
(A-B Erase)
HDD -RWVR
-RVR
You can select a section (scene) in a title and
erase it. Note that erasing scenes in a title
cannot be undone.
1
2
After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a
Title,” select “Edit,” and press
ENTER.
Select “A-B Erase,” and press
ENTER.
For the HDD, select a type of editing,
and press ENTER. For details, see
page 82.
The display for setting point A appears.
The title starts to play.
3
To cancel “A-B Erase”
Press O RETURN. The Title List appears.
z Hint
A chapter mark is inserted after the scene is erased.
The chapter mark divides the title into separate
chapters on either side of the mark.
b Notes
• Images or sound may be momentarily
interrupted at the point where you erase a section
of a title.
• Sections shorter than five seconds may not be
erased.
Dividing a title (Divide)
HDD -RWVR *
-RVR
*
If you want to dub a long title to a disc but do
not want to reduce the picture quality, divide
the title into two shorter titles. Note that
dividing a title cannot be undone.
* Only playlist titles can be divided for DVDRWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode.
1
After step 2 of “Erasing and Editing a
Title,” select “Edit,” and press
ENTER.
2
Select “Divide,” and press ENTER.
For the HDD, select a type of editing,
and press ENTER. For details, see
page 82.
The display for setting the dividing
point appears.
The title starts to play.
Select point A using m/M or H,
and press X.
• To return to the beginning of the title,
press X and then press ..
4
Select “From,” and press ENTER.
The position of point A is displayed.
5
6
7
Press H.
Select point B using m/M or H,
and press X.
Select “To,” and press ENTER.
The position of point B is displayed.
8
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The scene is erased.
3
Select the dividing point using m/
M or H, and press X.
• To return to the beginning of the title,
press X and then press ..
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
84
4
Press ENTER.
For the HDD, the display asks for
confirmation.
5
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER (HDD
only).
The title is divided into two.
Erasing and Editing a
Chapter
HDD -RWVR
-RVR
You can edit individual chapters within a
title. To edit DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR
mode) without changing the original
recordings, create a Playlist (page 87).
1
Press TITLE LIST.
For DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode,
switch the Title List (Original or
Playlist), if necessary.
2
Select a title containing the chapter
you want to edit, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3
4
Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
For the HDD, select a type of editing,
and press ENTER. For details, see
page 82.
5
Select an option, and press ENTER.
You can make the following edits to the
chapter.
“Divide”: Divides a chapter into two
(page 86).
“Erase/Move”
• “Erase”: Erases the selected chapter
(page 86).
• “Move” (for Playlist titles on DVDRWs/DVD-Rs in VR mode): Changes
the chapter’s playing order (page 88).
“Combine”: Combines two chapters
into one (page 86).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Erasing and Editing
Select “Chapter Edit,” and press
ENTER.
85
Dividing a chapter (Divide)
1
2
3
After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a
Chapter,” select “Divide.”
Select a chapter using </,.
Select the dividing point using m/
M or H, and press X.
• To return to the beginning of the
chapter, press X and then press ..
4
Combining multiple chapters
(Combine)
1
After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a
Chapter,” select “Combine.”
2
Move the combining bar using </
,, and press ENTER.
The two adjacent chapters of the
combining bar are combined.
Press ENTER.
b Note
The chapter is divided into two.
Chapters cannot be combined if they are
automatically created from an HDD camcorder
dubbing.
Erasing a chapter (Erase)
1
After step 4 of “Erasing and Editing a
Chapter,” select “Erase.”
2
Select a chapter using </,, and
press ENTER.
3
(For a Playlist chapter only)
Select “Erase,” and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
4
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The chapter is erased.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
86
Creating and Editing a
Playlist
-RWVR
4
Select “Move,” and press ENTER.
5
Select a new location for the title
using M/m, and press ENTER.
-RVR
Playlist edit allows you to edit or re-edit
without changing the actual recordings. You
can create up to 99 Playlist titles.
b Note
Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the
“Copy-Once” copy protection signal cannot be
dubbed or moved (page 157).
1
Press TITLE LIST, and switch to the
Playlist.
For details on switching to the Playlist,
see page 82.
2
Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
4
1
Select “Create,” and press ENTER.
Press TITLE LIST, and switch to the
Playlist.
The original titles in the Title List
appear.
For details on switching to the Playlist,
see page 82.
Select an original title to add to the
Playlist, and press ENTER.
The selected title is added to the Playlist.
5
Combining multiple Playlist
titles (Combine)
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select all of
the titles you want to add to the
Playlist.
2
Select a Playlist title, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3
4
Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
5
Select a title you want to combine,
and press ENTER.
6
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
Erasing and Editing
3
The title moves to the new location.
• To move more titles, repeat from step
2.
Select “Combine,” and press ENTER.
Moving a Playlist title (Move)
1
Press TITLE LIST, and switch to the
Playlist.
For details on switching to the Playlist,
see page 82.
2
Select a Playlist title, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
3
Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
The titles are combined.
Dividing a Playlist title (Divide)
You can divide a Playlist title. For
instructions, see page 84.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
87
Moving a chapter (Move)
1
Press TITLE LIST, and switch to the
Playlist.
For details on switching to the Playlist,
see page 82.
2
Select a Playlist title containing the
chapter you want to edit, and press
,.
The sub-menu appears.
3
4
Select “Edit,” and press ENTER.
5
Select “Erase/Move.”
6
Select a chapter using </,, and
press ENTER.
7
8
Select “Move,” and press ENTER.
Select “Chapter Edit,” and press
ENTER.
Select a new location for the chapter
using </,, and press ENTER.
The chapter moves to the new location.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
88
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)
Before Dubbing
In this section, “dubbing” refers to “copying
a recorded title on the internal hard disk
drive (HDD) to another disc, or vice versa.”
You can dub a playing title using the HDD/
DVD DUB button (see “HDD/DVD
Dubbing” on page 90) or you can select to
dub multiple titles all at once (see “Dubbing
Using Dubbing List” on page 90). You can
also dub an entire DVD disc to make a
backup copy (see “Making a Backup Disc
(DVD Backup)” on page 93).
Before you start, read the following
precautions, which are common to all
dubbing methods.
Before you start…
z Hint
When you dub a Playlist title, it is recorded as an
Original title.
b Notes
• You cannot make a recording while dubbing.
• Before playing a dubbed disc on other DVD
equipment, finalise the disc (page 46, 91).
• You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOs to the
HDD.
• Titles containing mixed aspect ratios cannot be
dubbed to a DVD+RW/DVD+R/DVD-RW/
DVD-R (Video mode) using the HDD/DVD
DUB button.
• Titles over 8 hours cannot be dubbed to singlelayer DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs.
• Low resolution (SEP through LP modes) 16:9
size titles cannot be dubbed to a DVD+RW/
DVD+R/DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
• Titles recorded in Dolby Digital 5.1 ch audio are
down-converted to 2-channel audio when
dubbed at normal speed (“Real time” dubbing).
• About the “Move” function, see page 157.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)
• You cannot record both the main and sub
sound on the HDD (when “HDD
Recording Format” is set to “Video Mode
On” in the “Recording” setup),
DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs (Video mode),
DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs (Video mode). For
bilingual programmes, set “Bilingual
Recording” to either “A/L” (default) or “B/
R” in the “Audio In” setup (page 132).
About HDD Recording format, see
page 137.
• A title name in the dubbing source is
dubbed. However, only up to 40 characters
of a title name are dubbed when dubbing
from the HDD to a DVD+RW/DVD-RW
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video
mode).
• The chapter marks in the dubbing source
are dubbed. The position of chapter marks
may be slightly changed from the original.
However, the chapter marks in the dubbing
source are not retained in the dubbed title
when dubbing to a DVD-RW/DVD-R
(Video mode), DVD+RW, or DVD+R at
normal speed. The chapter marks are
automatically inserted according to the
“Auto Chapter (Video)” and “Auto
Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” settings in the
“Recording” setup (page 136).
• The “Set Thumbnail” setting in the
dubbing source is dubbed as a thumbnail
picture marker (except when dubbing from
a DVD+RW/DVD-RW (Video mode)/
DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)). The
position of thumbnail picture markers may
be slightly changed from the original.
89
HDD/DVD Dubbing
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
You can dub a single title by pressing the
HDD/DVD DUB button during playback.
You can also dub from finalised DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs (Video mode) to the HDD.
1
2
Dubbing Using Dubbing
List
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
Start playback of a title.
You can select the titles you want to dub
using Dubbing List. You can also edit titles
before dubbing without changing the
original titles.
For playing a title, see “Playing” on
page 73.
1
Press HDD/DVD DUB.
2
3
The recorder starts dubbing the current
playing title from the beginning.
The recorder turns off automatically
when you do not use the recorder for
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing
has finished.
To cancel dubbing
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more
than one second.
When dubbing is stopped partway, no part of
the title will be moved to the dubbing target.
However, note that this will decrease the free
space for DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs.
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.
Select a dubbing direction, and press
ENTER.
To dub titles from the HDD to a disc,
select “HDD -> DVD.”
To dub titles from a disc to the HDD,
select “DVD/CD -> HDD.”
4
Select “Create New Dubbing List,”
and press ENTER.
The Dubbing List appears.
• If you have previously saved a
Dubbing List and want to resume
editing it, select “Use Previous
Dubbing List,” and go to step 7.
About dubbing mode
Titles on the HDD are dubbed to a disc at
high speed (“High-Speed” dubbing).
Titles on a disc are dubbed to the HDD at
normal speed (“Real time” dubbing).
For the minimum required time for “HighSpeed” dubbing, see page 157.
To convert the recording mode (only
when dubbing from a disc to the HDD)
Before step 1, press REC MODE to select
the recording mode.
A Direction of dubbing
B Total number of titles to be
dubbed
b Note
You cannot use the HDD/DVD DUB button in the
following cases. Dub the title using Dubbing List
(page 90).
– When dubbing the title recorded in MN6 mode
or longer duration mode to a DVD+RW/
DVD+R.
– When dubbing the title recorded in HQ+ mode to
a DVD.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
90
C Dubbing step number
Display 1: Select a title you want to
dub (the “Select Titles” display).
Display 2: Edit a title (the “Title
Edit” display).
Display 3: Confirm the settings and
start dubbing (the “Start Dubbing”
display).
D Total size of the selected titles and
available space on the disc to be
dubbed (approximate)
E Selected title’s thumbnail picture
5
Select a title, and press ENTER.
The selected title changes colour.
When you select “HDD -> DVD” in step
3, you can change the title order or
search for a title by genre (see “3.
Playing the Recorded Programme (Title
List)” on page 40).
6
Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles
in the order you want to dub.
7
Select “Next” using ,, and press
ENTER.
8
Select “Next” using ,, and press
ENTER.
The “Start Dubbing” display appears.
Select an option using M/m, and
press ENTER.
The options differ depending on the
dubbing direction or disc type.
“Recording Mode”: Changes the
dubbing mode of all selected titles at a
time using M/m (page 154).
“Input Disc Name”: Changes the disc
name (page 44).
“Finalise”: Select “Yes” to finalise a
disc automatically after dubbing (DVDRW/DVD-R (Video mode), or
DVD+R).
10 Select “Start Dubbing,” and press
ENTER.
When you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in step
9, select the title menu style, and press
ENTER.
The recorder turns off automatically
when you do not use the recorder for
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing
has finished.
To cancel dubbing
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more
than one second.
When dubbing (Move) is stopped partway,
no part of the title will be moved to the
dubbing target. However, note that this will
decrease the free space for DVD+Rs/DVDRs.
About dubbing mode
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)
The “Title Edit” display appears.
For details about editing, see “To edit
titles on the Dubbing List” on page 92.
9
“
” appears next to the title that can be
dubbed at high speed (“High-Speed”
dubbing) in the “Title Edit” display. The
following titles are dubbed at normal speed
(“Real time” dubbing).
– Titles containing both main and sub
sounds (except DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR
mode)).
– Titles recorded in mixed picture size (4:3
and 16:9, etc.) (except for DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs (VR mode)).
– Titles recorded on DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video
mode).
For the minimum required time for “HighSpeed” dubbing, see page 157.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
91
To edit titles on the Dubbing List
1
Follow steps 1 to 7 of “Dubbing Using
Dubbing List” on page 90.
The “Title Edit” display appears.
2
Select a title you want to edit, and press
ENTER.
The sub-menu appears.
3
Select an option, and press ENTER.
The options differ depending on the
dubbing direction or disc type.
“Erase”: Erases the selected title.
“Title Name”: Names or renames a title
(page 44).
“A-B Erase”: Erases the section of the
title (page 84).
“Move”: Changes the order of titles
(page 87).
“Preview”: Allows you to check the
content of a title.
“Divide”: Divides a title into two titles
(page 84).
“Combine”: Combines two titles
(page 87).
“Chapter Edit”: Edits chapters
(page 85).
“Set Thumbnail”: Changes the title’s
thumbnail frame that appears in the Title
List (page 42).
“Recording Mode”: Sets the picture
quality of the dubbing.
“Bilingual”: Sets how a bilingual audio
programme is dubbed.
“Cancel”: Exits the sub-menu.
4
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to edit all of the
titles.
5
Go to step 8 of “Dubbing Using
Dubbing List” on page 90 to dub edited
titles.
b Notes
• The Dubbing List you created remains after
dubbing. To edit the existing Dubbing List,
select “Use Previous Dubbing List” in step 4.
The Dubbing List is cleared when:
– you change “Input Line System” setting in the
“Basic” setup (page 125).
– you reset the recorder (page 150).
– you open the disc tray (except when dubbing
from the HDD).
– you edit the titles on a disc (except when
dubbing from the HDD).
– you switch the Title List to Original or Playlist
(when dubbing from DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in
VR mode only).
– you finalise the disc.
• The “seams” that are left over from editing may
remain on the disc after dubbing to DVD+RWs/
DVD-RWs (Video mode)/DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs
(Video mode).
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording
starts, even if you set “Finalise” to “Yes” in
step 9.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
92
Making a Backup Disc
(DVD Backup)
+RW
-RWVideo
+R
-RVideo
9
The disc is automatically finalised.
• To make another backup disc, replace
discs, select “Start,” and press
ENTER.
10 Select “Yes” or “No,” and press
ENTER.
You can dub all of the contents on a finalised
DVD+RW/DVD+R or finalised DVD-RW/
DVD-R (Video mode) to another recordable
DVD+RW/DVD-RW or unused DVD+R/
DVD-R via the HDD as a backup copy.
To erase the backup data on the HDD,
select “Yes.”
To make another backup disc later,
select “No.”
The recorder turns off automatically
when you do not use the recorder for
more than 20 minutes after the dubbing
has finished.
b Note
Backup discs of unfinalised discs cannot be made.
1
Select “Cancel,” and press ENTER.
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2
3
Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.
4
Select “Start new DVD Backup,” and
press ENTER.
Select “DVD Backup,” and press
ENTER.
5
6
Press and hold HDD/DVD DUB for more
than one second.
To erase backup data on the HDD
Insert the DVD you are going to make
a backup of.
Select “Erase back-up data” in step 4,
and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
2
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
b Notes
Press Z (open/close), and replace
the DVD with a recordable DVD+RW/
DVD-RW or an unused DVD+R/DVDR.
To make a backup disc of DVD+RWs/
DVD+Rs, insert a recordable
DVD+RW or unused DVD+R.
To make a backup disc of DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs, insert a recordable DVD-RW
or unused DVD-R.
8
To cancel DVD backup during dubbing
1
The recorder starts dubbing all of the
contents on a DVD to the HDD.
7
Press DISPLAY while dubbing.
• When dubbing to a DVD+R/DVD-R is stopped
partway in step 8, you cannot play or record on
the disc. However, a DVD+RW/DVD-RW can
be used again after it is reformatted.
• You cannot make a backup disc of DVD+R DLs/
DVD-R DLs.
• You may not use the “DVD Backup” function
depending on the recording quality or physical
condition of the disc, or characteristics of the
recording device and authoring software.
Dubbing (HDD y DVD)
• If you have previously dubbed backup
data to the HDD, select “Resume
writing data,” and go to step 7.
To display the dubbing information
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts “High-Speed”
dubbing the contents that were dubbed
to the HDD in step 6.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
93
b Notes
HDD Camcorder Dubbing
Before HDD Camcorder
Dubbing
You can dub the contents of a Sony HDD
camcorder to the hard disk drive of the
recorder via the USB jack on the front panel.
Methods to dub from the HDD camcorder
include:
• One-Touch Dubbing (Incremental
Dubbing)
• Dubbing using the on-screen display
(Incremental Dubbing/Full Dubbing)
Follow the instructions in “Preparing for
HDD camcorder dubbing,” and then move
on to the section on dubbing.
z Hints
• If you want to dub by way of the LINE IN jacks,
see “Recording from Connected Equipment” on
page 72.
• If you want to record the contents of the HDD
camcorder on a DVD, dub them to the HDD of
the recorder first, and then edit the title on the
HDD and dub it to a DVD.
• Parts finished dubbing remain on the recorder
when the HDD space of the recorder becomes
full or you stop dubbing partway.
• Dolby Digital 5.1 ch audio recorded in the HDD
camcorder can be dubbed to the recorder in the
same format, without down-conversion.
• No timer recordings or other operations are
available when dubbing from the HDD
camcorder.
• The supported device is Sony HDD SD
(standard definition) camcorder released in or
before April 2008.
• The recorder does not support the AVCHD
format (HD (high definition) image quality).
You can dub MPEG-2 format images (SD
(standard definition) images) only.
• When the HDD camcorder contains still images
and moving images, only moving images can be
dubbed to the recorder.
• Playlist made with the HDD camcorder cannot
be dubbed to the recorder.
• You cannot set the recording mode for HDD
camcorder dubbing.
• When dubbing from the HDD camcorder, the
recorder recognises and uses the shooting date
and time information of the HDD camcorder. If
the HDD camcorder’s clock is incorrect, the
recorder may not dub the contents properly. Set
the HDD camcorder’s clock correctly before
shooting.
• Images of the HDD camcorder are not displayed
when dubbing.
• You cannot record date, time, or the contents of
the HDD camcorder memory onto the recorder.
• If you dub the contents recorded in high quality
mode in the HDD camcorder to the recorder, it
may take longer to finish dubbing than the
recording.
• Set the recorder and HDD camcorder to the same
colour system.
How titles and chapters are created
In each dubbing operation, the contents
dubbed to the recorder are divided into titles
by the shooting date. If the date has been
changed to the next day during one shooting
session, the shot image is included in the title
of the date when the shooting session started.
The title is divided into chapters. Each
shooting session on the HDD camcorder
becomes a chapter.
z Hint
The title names are automatically labelled as “USB
*** (start time of the first shooting session).”
b Note
The dubbed contents are divided into titles in the
following cases, even if they were all recorded in
the same day:
– When the total recording time exceeds 12 hours.
– When the total number of scenes exceeds 99.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
94
b Notes
Preparing for HDD camcorder
dubbing
Connect an HDD camcorder to the USB jack
on the recorder.
Refer as well to the instruction manual
supplied with the HDD camcorder before
connecting.
1
Turn on your HDD camcorder and the
recorder.
2
Connect your HDD camcorder to the
USB jack on the front panel.
• Connect the HDD camcorder directly to the
recorder.
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while dubbing.
• When signal input to the USB jack (type A) on
the front panel or recorder operation cannot be
performed correctly when using an HDD
camcorder, connect the HDD camcorder to the
LINE IN jack and follow the instructions of
“Recording from Connected Equipment” on
page 72.
• The recorder can recognise and store the
shooting date and time information of up to 10
HDD camcorders. If you connect 11 or more
HDD camcorders, one-touch dubbing and
“Incremental Dubbing” cannot be made
properly.
DVD recorder
to USB jack
USB cable
(not supplied)
HDD camcorder
: Signal flow
3
HDD Camcorder Dubbing
USB output
Set your HDD camcorder to the USB
connection mode (example:
“ COMPUTER” or “ USB
CONNECT”).
For details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the HDD
camcorder.
To restart the connected USB device
Select “Restart USB Device” of “USB” in
the “Options 2” setup (page 142).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
95
One-Touch Dubbing from
HDD Camcorder (ONETOUCH DUB)
HDD
You can dub contents of your HDD
camcorder onto the HDD of the recorder
with a single press of the ONE-TOUCH
DUB button on the recorder.
When dubbing from the HDD camcorder for
the first time, all of the contents are dubbed
to the recorder. The next time, only newly
shot sessions that have not been dubbed yet
are dubbed to the recorder.
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Preparing for HDD
camcorder dubbing” on page 95, and
press ONE-TOUCH DUB on the recorder.
The recorder starts dubbing the contents on
the HDD camcorder to the HDD Title List of
the recorder.
The recorder turns off automatically if you
do not use the recorder for more than
20 minutes after the dubbing has finished.
Dubbing from HDD
Camcorder Using the OnScreen Display (HDDCam Dubbing)
HDD
You can dub the contents of your HDD
camcorder onto the HDD of the recorder
using the on-screen display.
Methods to dub from the HDD camcorder
include:
• Incremental Dubbing
The recorder automatically detects the
contents recorded on the connected HDD
camcorder, and starts dubbing from the
contents following the last dubbed
contents if there are contents that have
already been dubbed.
• Full Dubbing
The recorder dubs all contents of the HDD
camcorder, including the contents that
have already been dubbed to the recorder.
1
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “Preparing for
HDD camcorder dubbing” on
page 95.
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
To stop during dubbing
Press x REC STOP.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop dubbing.
b Notes
• The one-touch dubbing button on the HDD
camcorder does not function with the recorder.
• In One-Touch Dubbing, the contents that have
already been dubbed to the recorder cannot be
dubbed again, even after you erase them from
the recorder. To dub the same contents to the
recorder again, dub the entire contents of the
HDD camcorder (see “Dubbing from HDD
Camcorder Using the On-Screen Display (HDDCam Dubbing)” on page 96).
• Data about the dubbed contents are all cleared
when you reset the recorder (page 150).
• If the USB jack and the DV IN jack on the
recorder are both connected to a compatible
digital video camera, One-Touch Dubbing is
performed via the USB jack.
The System Menu appears.
3
Select “HDD-Cam/DV,” and press
ENTER.
4
Select “HDD-Cam Dubbing,” and
press ENTER.
5
Select “Incremental Dubbing” or
“Full Dubbing,” and press ENTER.
To dub newly shot contents only, select
“Incremental Dubbing.”
To dub all contents of the HDD
camcorder, select “Full Dubbing.”
The display asks for confirmation.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
96
6
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The recorder starts dubbing the contents
on the HDD camcorder to the HDD Title
List of the recorder.
The recorder turns off automatically if
you do not use the recorder for more
than 20 minutes after the dubbing has
finished.
To stop dubbing
Press x REC STOP. Or, select “Exit” in
step 6, and press ENTER.
b Note
With “Incremental Dubbing,” the contents that
have already been dubbed to the recorder are not
dubbed again, even after you erase them from the
recorder. You can dub only newly shot contents.
HDD Camcorder Dubbing
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
97
DV Camcorder Dubbing
Before DV Camcorder
Dubbing
This section explains dubbing with a DV
camcorder and playing the contents of a DV
camcorder via the DV IN jack on the front
panel. If you want to dub by way of the
LINE IN jacks, see “Recording from
Connected Equipment” on page 72.
The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to
the i.LINK standard.
Follow the instructions in “Preparing for DV
camcorder dubbing,” and then move on to
the section on dubbing. For more
information about i.LINK, see “About
i.LINK” on page 161.
How chapters are created
The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD
become a single title. This title is divided
into chapters. When dubbing to the HDD or
a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) and when
“Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On” in
the “Recording” setup (page 136), each
shooting session on the tape becomes a
chapter on the disc. For other discs, the
recorder divides the title into chapters
according to the “Auto Chapter (Video)” or
“Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)” setting in
the “Recording” setup (page 136).
z Hint
If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after
the initial dub, use the DV IN jack and record on a
DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR mode) or HDD.
b Notes
• You cannot make a recording while DV
camcorder dubbing.
• The DV IN jack is for input only. It will not
output signals.
• You cannot use the DV IN jack when:
– signal input to the DV IN jack on the front
panel or recorder operation cannot be
performed correctly when using a digital video
camera (see “About i.LINK” on page 161).
Connect the camera to the LINE IN jack and
follow the instructions of “Recording from
Connected Equipment” on page 72.
– the input signal is not in DVC-SD format. Do
not connect a MICRO MV format digital video
camera even if it has an i.LINK jack.
– the images on the tape contain copy protection
signals, which limit recording.
• If you want to play DVDs dubbed from a DV
camcorder on other DVD equipment, finalise the
disc (page 46).
• Set the recorder and DV camcorder to the same
colour system (page 125).
Hookups
DVD recorder
to DV IN
Preparing for DV camcorder
dubbing
You can connect a DV camcorder to the DV
IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from
a DV/Digital8 format tape. Operation is
straightforward because the recorder will
fast forward and rewind the tape for you –
you do not need to operate your DV
camcorder.
Refer as well to the instruction manual
supplied with the DV camcorder before
connecting.
i.LINK cable
(not supplied)
DV output
DV camcorder
: Signal flow
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
98
1
Press HDD or DVD to select the
recording destination.
If you select DVD, insert a disc (see “1.
Inserting a Disc” on page 38).
2
Insert the source DV/Digital8 format
tape into your DV camcorder.
For the recorder to record or edit, your
DV camcorder must be set to video
playback mode.
3
Press REC MODE on the remote
repeatedly to select the recording
mode.
The recording mode changes as follows:
For details about the recording mode,
see page 154. Note that you cannot
select further manual recording mode
options.
4
Set the “External Audio” setting in
the “Audio In” setup (page 132).
5
Set the “DV Input” setting in the
“Audio In” setup (page 132).
You are ready to start dubbing. Select
one of the dubbing methods on the
following pages.
• You cannot connect more than one piece of
digital video equipment to the recorder.
• You cannot control the recorder using another
device or another recorder of the same model.
• You cannot record date, time, or the contents of
the cassette memory onto the disc.
• If you record from a DV/Digital8 format tape
that is recorded in multiple sound tracks, such as
a tape with multiple sampling frequencies
(48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 32 kHz), no sound or an
unnatural sound will be output when playing
back the sampling frequency switch point on the
disc.
• In order to use this recorder’s “Auto Chapter”
setting (page 98), be sure to correctly set the
clock on your DV camcorder before shooting.
• The recorded picture may be momentarily
affected or the start and end points of a title may
be different from what you have set if the source
DV/Digital8 format tape is in any of the
following conditions. In this case, connect your
digital video camera to the LINE IN jack and
follow the instructions of “Recording from
Connected Equipment” (page 72).
– There is a blank space in the recorded portion
of the tape.
– The tape’s time code is not sequential.
– If the picture size or the recording mode on the
tape being dubbed changes.
• A blank or black coloured screen will be dubbed
when the recorder is set to a different colour
system from the DV tape contents’ system. Set
“Input Line System” in the “Basic” setup to the
same colour system as the DV tape contents’
system (page 125).
You can check the contents of DV/Digital8
format tape before dubbing. For details, see
“Playing from a DV Camcorder” on
page 101.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
DV Camcorder Dubbing
To playback DV/Digital8 format tape
b Notes
99
Dubbing an Entire DV
Format Tape (DV OneTouch Dubbing)
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
+R
You can record the entire contents of a DV/
Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single
press of the ONE-TOUCH DUB button on
the recorder. The recorder controls the DV
camcorder for the whole process, and
completes the recording.
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for DV
camcorder dubbing” on page 98, and
press ONE-TOUCH DUB on the recorder.
The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts
recording the tape contents.
After the recording is finished, the recorder
rewinds the tape in the DV camcorder, and
finalises the recorded disc (except DVDRW/DVD-R (VR mode)) automatically.
To stop during recording
Press and hold x REC STOP for more than
3 seconds.
Note that it may take a few seconds for the
recorder to stop recording.
b Notes
• When a blank space between the recordings on
the tape continues for more than two minutes,
DV One-Touch Dubbing ends automatically.
• The recorder will pause recording when there is
a blank space or an image containing copy
protection signals on the tape. The recorder will
resume recording automatically when receiving
a recordable signal.
• Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording
starts (except for DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR
mode)).
• DV One-Touch Dubbing ends automatically
when there are images containing copy
protection signals at the beginning of the tape.
• When connecting digital video cameras to both
DV IN jack and USB jack, pressing the ONETOUCH DUB button starts dubbing from the
HDD camcorder. Disconnect the HDD
camcorder from the USB jack to dub from the
DV camcorder.
Dubbing Selected
Scenes (DV Manual
Dubbing)
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
+R
You can select and dub scenes while playing
a DV/Digital8 format tape.
1
Follow steps 1 to 5 of “Preparing for
DV camcorder dubbing” on page 98.
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3
Select “HDD-Cam/DV,” and press
ENTER.
4
Select “DV Manual Dubbing,” and
press ENTER.
5
Select the recording destination,
“Record to Hard Disk Drive” or
“Record to DVD,” and press ENTER.
6
Press H.
The scene starts to play.
7
Find the point on the DV/Digital8
format tape that you want to start
dubbing from using m/M or c/
C, and press X.
8
Select “Start Rec.,” and press
ENTER.
The recorder starts dubbing.
9
Select “Pause Rec,” and press
ENTER.
The recorder pauses dubbing.
10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to dub more
scenes.
11 Select “Stop Rec,” and press ENTER.
The selected scenes are dubbed as a
single title.
To exit “DV Manual Dubbing”
Press SYSTEM MENU.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
100
-RWVR -RWVideo
z Hint
You can turn off the dubbing menu by pressing the
DISPLAY button during dubbing. Press the
DISPLAY button again to display the dubbing
menu.
b Note
You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one
second.
Playing from a DV
Camcorder
1
Connect your DV camcorder to the DV
IN jack on the front panel.
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3
Select “HDD-Cam/DV,” and press
ENTER.
4
Select “DV Playback,” and press
ENTER.
5
Start playback on the DV camcorder.
Images from the DV camcorder appear
on your TV screen.
To cancel playback
Press SYSTEM MENU.
z Hint
You can dub the playing tape contents. During
playback, press HDD or DVD to select the
dubbing destination, and press z REC. To stop
dubbing, press x REC STOP.
DV Camcorder Dubbing
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
101
Music Jukebox
About Jukebox
There are two methods to use Jukebox:
connecting the USB device or copying audio
tracks to the HDD.
When using Jukebox, you can do following:
• Store audio tracks on the HDD.
• Play audio tracks using various play
modes.
• Label tracks, albums, or artists.
• Create a Playlist.
Notes on copying
• You cannot copy audio tracks on the HDD to
discs or USB devices.
• Some audio tracks may not be copied depending
on the file size.
• An artist name, album name, and MP3 audio
track name are copied, and albums and MP3
tracks are stored in each artist folder. However,
albums and MP3 audio tracks are stored in the
“Unknown” folder when their artist name cannot
be copied.
• Audio tracks from a CD are stored in the artist
folder labelled “Unknown.” Names are
automatically labelled; “A_*****_F_*****” for
album, “A_*****_F_*****_T_*****” for
audio tracks.
• When copying is stopped partway, tracks that
have finished copying before you stop will
remain copied onto the HDD as an album.
You can check which albums have been copied
in the Music Jukebox list (page 104).
• No other operations are available when copying
audio tracks.
• While copying audio tracks, timer recordings are
unavailable. If the timer is set during copying,
the recorder starts the timer recording after
copying is finished.
• Copy-protected CDs cannot be copied to the
HDD.
Preparing for Using
Jukebox
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on
the recorder, or copy audio tracks from the
connected USB device or CDs/DATA CDs/
DATA DVDs to the HDD.
Connecting the USB device
You can connect a USB device to the USB
jack on the recorder to listen to the MP3
audio tracks or copy to the HDD. Refer to
the operating instructions supplied with the
USB device before connecting.
DVD recorder
to USB jack
USB device
b Note
Some USB devices may not work with this
recorder.
Copying tracks or albums
(USB t HDD)
You can copy up to 99 albums or 999 audio
tracks on the USB device to the HDD.
1
Connect the USB device to the USB
jack on the recorder (page 102).
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3
Select “Music Jukebox,” and press
ENTER.
4
Select “Listen to Music from USB
Device,” and press ENTER.
The “Music Jukebox (USB)” appears.
5
Select an album to copy using M/m,
and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
102
6
Select “Edit” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
7
Select an item using M/m, and press
ENTER.
To copy all albums, select “Copy all to
HDD.”
To copy the selected albums, select
“Copy to HDD.”
The display asks for confirmation.
8
Select “Yes” using </,, and
press ENTER.
The albums are copied to the HDD.
• To copy more albums, repeat from
step 5.
Copying tracks or albums on
the HDD (HDD y HDD)
1
The System Menu appears.
2
Select “Music Jukebox,” and press
ENTER.
3
Select “Listen to Music / Edit,” and
press ENTER.
The “Music Jukebox (HDD)” appears.
4
Select an artist using M/m, and press
ENTER.
5
Select an album using M/m, and
press ENTER.
To cancel copying
If you want to copy the album, press ,
instead of ENTER, then go to step 7.
Press ENTER.
Copying audio tracks
(DISC t HDD)
1
Insert a disc that you are going to
copy to the HDD.
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3
4
Select “Dubbing,” and press ENTER.
Select “DVD/CD -> HDD” using M/m,
and press ENTER.
To cancel copying
Press ENTER.
b Note
Before copying, select “CD” or “MP3” under
“Data Format” in the Title List (DVD/CD)
(page 74).
6
Select a track to copy using M/m, and
press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
7
Select “Edit” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
8
Select “Copy Album” or “Copy
Track” using M/m, and press ENTER.
9
Select a copy destination (an artist or
album) using M/m, and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
10 Select “Yes” using </,, and
press ENTER.
The albums or tracks are copied to the
HDD.
• To copy more tracks or albums, repeat
from step 4.
Music Jukebox
The copying starts.
Press SYSTEM MENU.
To cancel copying
Press ENTER.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
103
Playing Audio Tracks
Using Jukebox/USB
Device
1
Press SUBTITLE (previous)/ANGLE (next)
while the Music Jukebox list is displayed.
Each time you press SUBTITLE (previous)/
ANGLE (next), the Music Jukebox list
changes to the previous/next page of the list.
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2
Select “Music Jukebox,” and press
ENTER.
3
Select “Listen to Music / Edit” or
“Listen to Music from USB Device,”
and press ENTER.
To listen to the audio tracks on the
HDD, select “Listen to Music / Edit.”
To listen to the MP3 audio tracks from
the connected USB device, select
“Listen to Music from USB Device.”
The Music Jukebox list appears.
4
To scroll the list display by page (Page
mode)
To change the play information (HDD
only)
Press DISPLAY repeatedly.
Each time you press the button, information
below the artist/album/track list is changed.
About the Playlist and Original list (HDD
only)
You can switch the “Music Jukebox (HDD)”
to show tracks in Original list or Playlist.
1
Press < while the “Music Jukebox
(HDD)” is displayed.
2
Select “Play List” using M/m, and press
ENTER.
3
Select an item using M/m, and press
ENTER.
Select an artist, album, or track, and
press H.
(HDD only) To display an album list,
select an artist using M/m, and press
ENTER.
To display a track list, select an album
using M/m, and press ENTER.
Playback starts.
To return to the previous display
Press O RETURN. If you cannot return to
the artist list or album list using
O RETURN, see “To change the display
mode (Original list only)” on page 104.
Display
Original
Tracks in the Original list.
Play List 1
Play List 2
Play List 3
Play List 4
Tracks in each Playlist.
Favourites
Tracks in order of
playback frequency. The
track that is most often
played is listed at the top.
To change the display mode (Original list
only)
1
Press < while the “Music Jukebox
(HDD)” is displayed.
2
Select “Display Mode” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
3
Select an item using M/m, and press
ENTER.
To stop playback
Press x (stop).
Item
Item
Display
Artist (HDD
only)
Artist list appears.
Album
Album list appears.
Track
Track list appears.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
104
Adding audio tracks to a
Playlist (HDD only)
You can add audio tracks on the HDD to the
Playlist. You can add up to 25 audio tracks
to each Playlist.
1
After step 2 of “Playing Audio Tracks
Using Jukebox/USB Device,” select
“Listen to Music / Edit,” and press
ENTER.
Buttons
Operations
X (pause)
Pauses playback.
To resume normal playback,
press H.
Playing repeatedly (Repeat)
You can repeatedly play tracks or a single
track.
1
2
Select a track to add to the Playlist,
and press ,.
2
Select “Add to Play List,” and press
ENTER.
4
Select a Playlist, and press ENTER.
3
Select “Repeat” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
4
Select an item using M/m.
“Repeat Artist” (HDD only): repeats
tracks of the current artist.
“Repeat Album”: repeats the current
album.
“Repeat Track”: repeats the current
track.
“Repeat Play List” (HDD only): repeats
the current Playlist.
“Repeat Programme” (USB device
only): repeats the current programme
(page 106).
The track is added to the selected
Playlist.
5
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to select all of the
tracks you want to add to the Playlist.
• To check the Playlist tracks, switch to
the Playlist.
Playback options
Operations
./>
(previous/
next)
Goes to the next or previous
track when pressed during
playback.
m/M
(fast
reverse/
fast
forward)
Fast reverses/fast forwards the
disc when pressed during
playback.
Search speed changes as
follows:
fast reverse fast forward
mFR1 T t MFF1
mFR2 T T t t MFF2
When you press and hold the
button, fast forward/fast
reverse continues at the
selected speed until you
release the button.
To resume normal playback,
press H.
5
Press ENTER.
Repeat play starts.
To cancel Repeat play
Set “Repeat” to “Repeat Off” in step 4.
Music Jukebox
Buttons
(USB device only) Select “Play
Mode” using M/m, and press ENTER.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
The sub-menu appears.
3
Press , during playback.
If you are playing tracks on the HDD, go
to step 3.
Switch the display to the Original list
(page 104).
b Note
You can select “Repeat Programme” only during
Programme play.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
105
Creating your own programme
(Programme) (USB device only)
You can play the contents of the connected
USB device in the order you want by
arranging the order of the tracks on the
connected USB device to create your own
programme. You can make a programme of
up to 24 tracks.
1
Press , while the “Music Jukebox
(USB)” is displayed.
2
Select “Play Mode” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
The “Play Mode” menu appears.
3
Select “Programme,” and press
ENTER.
4
Select “Input/Edit Programme,” and
press ENTER.
5
Select an album (example: Album 01)
using M/m, and press ,.
6
Select a track (example: Track 001)
using M/m, and press ENTER.
To cancel Programme play
Set “Programme” to “Cancel Programme
Play” in the “Play Mode” menu during
playback.
To erase the programme
Set “Programme” to “Erase Programme
List” in the “Play Mode” menu.
z Hints
• The programme you made remains after
Programme play finishes. To play the same
programme again, set “Programme” to “Start
Programme Play” in the “Play Mode” menu.
However, the programme is cleared after you
press [/1.
• You can repeat Programme play. During
Programme play, set “Repeat” to “Repeat
Programme” in the “Play Mode” menu
(page 105).
The track is programmed.
If you make a mistake, select the step
number (example: 01.) using </M/m,
and press CLEAR.
7
To programme other tracks, press
</M/m/, to select a step number,
and repeat steps 5 and 6.
8
Press H.
Programme play starts.
To stop Programme play
Press x (stop).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
106
Managing Audio Tracks
on the Music Jukebox
(HDD only)
You can erase or label artists/albums/tracks
on the HDD.
1
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2
Select “Music Jukebox,” and press
ENTER.
3
Select “Listen to Music / Edit,” and
press ENTER.
The “Music Jukebox (HDD)” appears.
5
Select an option, and press ENTER.
“Erase”: Erases the selected artist/
album/track. Select “Yes” when asked
for confirmation.
“Edit”: Allows you to make the
following edits.
• “Artist Name”: Allows you to enter or
re-enter an artist name (page 44).
• “Album Name”: Allows you to enter
or re-enter an album name (page 44).
• “Track Name”: Allows you to enter or
re-enter a track name (page 44).
• “Copy Album”: Allows you to copy an
album (page 103).
• “Copy Track”: Allows you to copy a
track (page 103).
“Repeat”: Repeats playback of artist/
album/track (page 105).
“Add to Play List”: Allows you to add
tracks to a Playlist (page 105).
“Play List Name”: Allows you to enter
or re-enter a Playlist name (up to 12
characters) (page 44).
b Note
You cannot edit audio tracks on the connected
USB device.
4
Select an artist, album, or track, and
press ,.
To display an album list, select an artist
using M/m, and press ENTER.
To display a track list, select an album
using M/m, and press ENTER.
Music Jukebox
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
107
Photo Album
About the “Photo
Album” Function
The “Photo Album” function enables you to
do following.
• Store JPEG image files on the HDD.
• View JPEG image files on the HDD,
DATA DVDs (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs)/
DATA CDs, or connected USB device.
• Edit JPEG image files.
• Print JPEG image files.
• Copy JPEG image files and slideshow to
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs.
• Create a slideshow with your favourite
music and graphic effects (x-Pict Story).
Preparing for Using the
“Photo Album” Function
Connect a USB device to the USB jack on
the recorder, or copy JPEG image files from
DATA CDs/DATA DVDs or the connected
USB device to the HDD.
Connecting the USB device
You can connect a USB device (digital still
camera, Memory card reader, and USB
memory) to the USB jack on the recorder to
view JPEG image files or copy to the HDD.
Refer to the operating instructions supplied
with the USB device before connecting.
DVD recorder
to USB jack
USB cable (not supplied)
USB output
Digital still camera
: Signal flow
b Note
Some USB devices may not work with this
recorder.
Copying JPEG image files to
the HDD (DISC/USB t HDD)
1
Insert a disc that you are going to
copy to the HDD or connect the USB
device to the USB jack on the
recorder.
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
108
3
Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
10 Select “Copy to HDD,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
4
Select the item, and press ENTER.
To copy from DATA CDs/DATA
DVDs (DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs), select
“View Photos on a DVD/CD.”
To copy from the connected USB
device, select “View Photos on a USB
Device.”
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Example: DVD/CD
The display asks for confirmation.
11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
• To cancel, select “No.”
Copying all JPEG image files
from the connected USB
device (USB t DVD-RW/DVDR)
1
Connect the USB device to the USB
jack on the recorder.
2
Insert a blank DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video
mode).
3
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
5
Select an album or JPEG image file
using M/m, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
6
Select “Multi-Mode” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
• To copy all the albums and JPEG
image files, select “Copy all to HDD,”
and go to step 11.
• To copy the album or file selected in
step 5 only, select “Copy to HDD,”
and go to step 11.
7
Select an album or JPEG image file,
and press ENTER.
8
Repeat step 7 to select all of the
albums or JPEG image files you want
to copy.
9
Press ,.
Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
5
Select “Copy Photos from a Digital
Camera,” and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
6
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
• To cancel, select “No.”
z Hint
See “7. Reformatting a Disc” (page 49) to format
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
b Notes
• During copying, other operations cannot be
performed.
• While copying JPEG image files, timer
recordings are unavailable. If the timer is set
during copying, the recorder starts the timer
recording after copying is finished.
Photo Album
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, press , to
select “Single-Mode” from the submenu.
4
The sub-menu appears.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
109
Copying JPEG image files or
albums on the HDD
(HDD y HDD)
1
12 Select the destination album using
M/m, and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
13 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
• To cancel, select “No.”
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2
Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
3
Select “View/Edit Photos on the
HDD,” and press ENTER.
b Note
Albums or JPEG image files are not copied to the
HDD in the following cases.
– when the HDD disc space is insufficient for
copying.
– when there are already the maximum number of
files and/or albums on the HDD.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
4
Select an album using M/m.
To copy the selected album, go to step 6.
To copy a JPEG image file, go to step 5.
5
6
Press ENTER, and select a JPEG
image file using M/m.
Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
7
Select “Multi-Mode” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
• To copy the selected album, select
“Copy Album Contents” in “Album
Options,” and go to step 12.
• To copy the selected files, select
“Copy” in “File Options,” and go to
step 12.
8
Select an album or JPEG image file,
and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, press , to
select “Single-Mode” from the submenu.
9
Repeat step 8 to select all of the
albums or JPEG image files you want
to copy.
10 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
Copying JPEG image albums
to a disc (HDD t DVD-RW/
DVD-R)
You can copy the edited JPEG image albums
to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a
video file. You can play the slideshow on
other DVD equipment that may not be
compatible with the playback of JPEG
image files.
1
Insert a DVD-RW/DVD-R (in Video
mode).
2
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
3
Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
4
Select “View/Edit Photos on the
HDD,” and press ENTER.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
5
Select an album using M/m, and
press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
6
Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
ENTER.
To copy the album selected in step 5
only, go to step 10.
11 Select “Copy,” and press ENTER.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
110
7
Select an album, and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, press , to
select “Single-Mode” from the submenu.
8
Repeat step 7 to select all of the
albums you want to copy.
9
Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
Copying JPEG image files to a
disc (HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R)
You can copy the edited JPEG image files to
a DVD-RW/DVD-R (Video mode).
A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a
video file. You can play the slideshow on
other DVD equipment that may not be
compatible with the playback of JPEG
image files.
1
10 Select “Copy to DVD,” and press
ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
11 Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The selected JPEG image albums are
copied in the “PICTURE” folder on the
disc.
The JPEG image album names are
automatically labelled as
“***ALBUM.”
If you want to play the disc on other
DVD equipment, finalise the disc
(page 46).
• To cancel, select “No.”
z Hints
• See “7. Reformatting a Disc” (page 49) to format
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which
albums have been copied (page 112).
The “Photo Album” list appears.
2
Select an album using M/m, and
press ENTER.
The photo list appears.
3
Select a JPEG image file using M/m,
and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
4
Select “Multi-Mode,” and press
ENTER.
To copy the JPEG image file selected in
step 3 only, go to step 8.
5
Select a JPEG image file, and press
ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, press , to
select “Single-Mode” from the submenu.
6
Repeat step 5 to select all of the JPEG
image files you want to copy.
7
Press ,.
Photo Album
b Notes
• You may not be able to play the slideshow
depending on DVD equipment.
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a
recordable DVD which has been recorded using
other recorders/devices.
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not
be able to play on other equipment.
• You can record up to 99 slideshows to a disc.
• When copying an album containing more than
99 JPEG image files to a disc, slideshows will be
created with every 99 JPEG image files and
recorded to a disc.
• For DVDs, the available disc space does not
increase even if you erase slideshows.
Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Copying JPEG
image albums to a disc
(HDD t DVD-RW/DVD-R)” on
page 110.
The sub-menu appears.
8
Select “Copy to DVD,” and press
ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
111
9
Select “Yes,” and press ENTER.
The selected JPEG image files are
copied in the “PICTURE” folder on the
disc.
The JPEG image file names are
automatically labelled as “PHOT****.”
If you want to play the disc on other
DVD equipment, finalise the disc
(page 46).
• To cancel, select “No.”
Using the “Photo
Album” List
You can play JPEG image files on the HDD,
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected
USB device using the “Photo Album” list.
1
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
To select a JPEG image file from a
different album
1
Switch to the album list in step 5.
For instructions, see “To switch
between the album list and JPEG image
file list” on page 114.
2
Select an album using M/m, and press
<.
3
Switch to the JPEG image file list.
For instructions, see “To switch
between the album list and JPEG image
file list” on page 114.
4
Select a JPEG image file using M/m, and
press ENTER.
z Hints
• See “7. Reformatting a Disc” (page 49) to format
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs in Video mode.
• See the “Photo Album” list to check which JPEG
image files have been copied (page 112).
2
Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
3
Select the item, and press ENTER.
To play JPEG image files on the HDD,
select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.”
To play JPEG image files on DATA
CDs/DATA DVDs, select “View Photos
on a DVD/CD.”
To play JPEG image files on the
connected USB device, select “View
Photos on a USB Device.”
The “Photo Album” list appears.
4
Select an album using M/m, and
press ENTER.
To show the 4-Photo List or 1-Photo
List, press < to select “Title View,”
and press ENTER, then select “4
Photos” or “1 Photo” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
b Notes
• You may not be able to play the slideshow
depending on DVD equipment.
• You cannot copy JPEG image files to a
recordable DVD which has been recorded using
other recorders/devices.
• DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not
be able to play on other equipment.
• You can record up to 99 slideshows to a disc.
• For DVDs, the available disc space does not
increase even if you erase slideshows.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
112
12-Photo List (Example: HDD)
A Album name
B Album size
C Sub-menu:
Press , to display the sub-menu.
The sub-menu displays options
applicable only to the selected item. The
displayed options differ depending upon
the model, situation, and disc type.
For details about the sub-menu options,
see “Managing JPEG Image Files on the
HDD” on page 117.
4-Photo List
m
Sub-menu
D Scroll bar:
Appears when all of the JPEG image
files do not fit on the list. To view the
hidden JPEG image files, press M/m.
1-Photo List
m
E Album and JPEG image file
information:
Displays the image, JPEG image file
number, recording date and time, JPEG
image file name, and JPEG image file
size. “ ” appears for protected JPEG
image files.
F Remaining space on the HDD
Press ./> while the “Photo Album”
list is displayed. Each time you press ./
>, the “Photo Album” list changes to the
previous/next page of albums/JPEG image
files.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Photo Album
To scroll the list display by page (Page
mode)
113
To switch between the album list and
JPEG image file list
1
Press < while the “Photo Album” list
is displayed.
2
Select “Display Mode” using M/m, and
press ENTER.
3
Select “File” or “Album” using M/m,
and press ENTER.
z Hints
• You can switch the thumbnail picture on the
album list among the JPEG image files in the
selected album by pressing m/M.
• You can switch to the previous or next album by
pressing m/M on the JPEG image file list.
To turn off the “Photo Album” list
Press SYSTEM MENU.
To display the detailed information
1
2
Select a JPEG image file, and press ,.
Select “Detailed Information,” and press
ENTER.
The detailed information for the selected
JPEG image file appears.
To reload the files or folders
When a disc or the connected USB device
contains 1,000 or more files and/or 100 or
more folders, select “Read next” in the
“Photo Album” list, and press ENTER to
view unloaded files or folders.
It may take a few minutes to load files or
folders.
b Note
The thumbnail for a file that cannot be playable on
the recorder is displayed as “ .”
Playing a slideshow
1
Follow steps 1 to 4 of “Using the
“Photo Album” List.”
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Switch between the album list and JPEG
image file list, if necessary.
2
Select an album or JPEG image file
using M/m, and press H.
The slideshow starts.
z Hint
You can start a slideshow by selecting “Start
Slideshow” from the sub-menu.
b Notes
• Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures
may be displayed with black bands at top and
bottom, or left and right.
• Large picture files may take a few seconds to
display. This is not a malfunction.
To stop a slideshow
Press x (stop) or O RETURN.
To pause a slideshow
Press X (pause).
To view the previous/next image during a
slideshow
Press ./>.
To zoom an image
Press ZOOM repeatedly during a slideshow.
Each time you press ZOOM, the
magnification changes as shown below.
2× t 4× t normal magnification
You can move the area you want to zoom
using </M/m/,.
To rotate an image
Press ANGLE repeatedly during a
slideshow.
Each time you press ANGLE, the image
turns clockwise by 90°.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
114
To play a slideshow with the sound (HDD
only)
You can enjoy a slideshow while listening to
the sound stored in the HDD. First prepare
Music Playlists by adding audio tracks using
Jukebox (see “Adding audio tracks to a
Playlist (HDD only)” on page 105).
1
Select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD”
in step 3 of “Using the “Photo Album”
List” on page 112.
The “Photo Album” list appears.
Switch between the album list and JPEG
image file list, if necessary.
2
Select an album or JPEG image file
using M/m, and press ,.
3
Select “Start Audio Slideshow,” and
press ENTER.
4
Select the desired Music Playlist or
“Favourites” using </,.
5
Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
The slideshow and the playback from
the first track of the selected Music
Playlist start.
b Notes
• While playing a slideshow with the sound, you
cannot do the following:
– Zoom, rotate, skip or pause an image.
– Display information on the screen by pressing
DISPLAY.
• If there is no audio track in the selected Music
Playlist, the slideshow is played back with no
sound.
Creating a Slideshow
with Your Favourite
Music and Graphic
Effects (x-Pict Story)
(HDD only)
You can easily create and play your own
slideshow with your favourite music in
Music Playlist and graphic effects using the
JPEG image files on the HDD (x-Pict Story).
First prepare Music Playlists by adding
audio tracks using Jukebox (see “Adding
audio tracks to a Playlist (HDD only)” on
page 105). The created x-Pict Story is
automatically stored in the Title List (HDD)
and you can copy it onto a recordable disc.
1
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2
Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
3
Select “View/Edit Photos on the
HDD,” and press ENTER.
The “Photo Album (HDD)” list appears.
4
Select an album, and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
5
Select “Create x-Pict Story” using M/
m, and press ENTER.
Photo Album
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
115
6
Select a graphic effect and a Music
Playlist using </M/m/,.
• “Theme”: Select a theme. The
recorder adds graphic effects
according to the theme you set from
the following:
“Happy moments (1)”: with simple
graphic effects
“Happy moments (2)”: with simple
graphic effects rapidly changing
“Nostalgic memories”: in
monochrome
“Sweetest recollections”: with moving
graphic effects
“Blissful life”: with moving graphic
effects rapidly changing
“Normal”: no graphic effects
• “Play List”: Select the desired Music
Playlist or “Favourites.” For an
explanation of how to make a Music
Playlist, see “Adding audio tracks to a
Playlist (HDD only)” on page 105.
7
Select “Next,” and press ENTER.
The copyright message appears on the
screen.
8
Select “Yes” using </,, and
press ENTER.
The x-Pict Story is saved as a video file
in the Title List on the HDD.
The title names are automatically
labelled as “x-Pict_Story ***” using the
name of the selected album folder.
To stop creating x-Pict Story
Press and hold x REC STOP for more than
3 seconds.
b Notes
• You cannot make a recording while creating an
x-Pict Story.
• If there is no JPEG image file in the selected
folder, you cannot create an x-Pict Story.
• If there is no audio track in the selected Music
Playlist, the x-Pict Story is created with no
sound.
• The selected Music Playlist may not be played
back to the end depending on the number of
JPEG image files.
• If the HDD is full, a warning message appears
and you cannot create an x-Pict Story.
• While creating an x-Pict Story, you cannot do
the following:
– Zoom, rotate, skip or pause an image.
– Display information on the screen by pressing
DISPLAY.
• The order of graphic effects changes at random
every time you create an x-Pict Story in the same
theme.
• Do not disconnect (remove) or connect (insert)
the USB cable, i.LINK cable or CAM while
creating an x-Pict Story. This may cause the xPict Story to be created incorrectly.
• The graphic effect may not show a smooth
motion or not appear correctly on the created xPict Story depending on conditions, such as size
of the image files.
To play an x-Pict Story
You can play a created x-Pict Story from the
Title List on the HDD.
For details, see “3. Playing the Recorded
Programme (Title List)” on page 40.
To dub an x-Pict Story
You can dub a created x-Pict Story to DVDs.
For details, see “Dubbing (HDD y DVD)”
on page 89. If you want to play the disc on
other DVD equipment, finalise the disc
(page 46).
z Hints
• The order of audio tracks in the created x-Pict
Story is followed by that of Music Playlist. If
you want to change its order, change the order of
Music Playlist before creating an x-Pict Story.
• If the selected folder has no name, the title names
are automatically labelled with the date when the
x-Pict Story was created.
• An x-Pict Story is created in the HQ mode.
• To edit x-Pict Story titles, see “Erasing and
Editing” on page 82.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
116
Managing JPEG Image
Files on the HDD
1
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
2
Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
“Multi-Mode”: Selects multiple albums
or JPEG image files to edit.
“Copy all to HDD”: Copies all the
albums and JPEG image files to the
HDD (page 108).
“Copy to HDD”: Copies the selected
album or JPEG image file to the HDD
(page 108).
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
3
Select “View/Edit Photos on the
HDD,” and press ENTER.
The “Photo Album (HDD)” list appears.
4
Select an album or JPEG image file,
and press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
5
Select an option, and press ENTER.
You can make the following edits to the
album/JPEG image file.
“Start Slideshow”: Starts a slideshow
(page 114).
“Start Audio Slideshow” (HDD only):
Starts a slideshow with the sound
(page 115).
“File Options”
• “Erase”: Erases the selected JPEG
image file.
• “Copy”: Copies the selected JPEG
image file (page 110).
• “Rename File”: Changes the selected
JPEG image file name (page 44).
• “Protect”: Protects the selected JPEG
image file. Select again to cancel the
protection.
“Print”: Prints the selected JPEG image
file (page 118).
“Detailed Information”: Displays the
detailed information for the selected
JPEG image file (page 114).
“Single-Mode”: Cancels “Multi-Mode.”
“Create x-Pict Story”: Creates a new xPict Story (page 115).
“New Album”: Creates a new album.
Photo Album
“Album Options”
• “Erase Album”: Erases the selected
album.
• “Copy Album Contents”: Copies all
JPEG image files in the selected album
to the HDD (page 110).
• “Rename Album”: Changes the
selected album name (page 44).
• “Protect Album Contents”: Protects all
JPEG image files in the selected
album.
• “Cancel Protection”: Cancels
protection of all JPEG image files in
the selected album.
“Copy to DVD”: Copies the selected
album or JPEG image file to a DVD
(page 110).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
117
Printing JPEG Image
Files
You can print JPEG image files on the HDD,
DATA DVDs/DATA CDs, or connected
USB device by connecting a PictBridgecompatible printer to the USB jack on the
recorder.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the
printer.
1
5
To print JPEG image files on the HDD,
select “View/Edit Photos on the HDD.”
To print JPEG image files on a DATA
DVD/DATA CD, select “View Photos
on a DVD/CD.”
To print JPEG image files from the
connected USB device, select “View
Photos on a USB Device.”
The “Photo Album” list appears.
6
Select an album, and press ENTER.
7
Select a file using M/m, and press
,.
Connect a PictBridge-compatible
printer to the USB jack on the
recorder.
DVD recorder
to USB jack
The sub-menu appears.
8
9
Connect the USB device to the USB
jack on the recorder.
When printing JPEG image files on the
HDD or DATA DVDs/DATA CDs,
skip this step.
3
Press SYSTEM MENU.
The System Menu appears.
4
Select “Photo Album,” and press
ENTER.
The “Photo Album” menu appears.
Select the item, and press ENTER.
To print two or more files, select “MultiMode.”
To print the file selected in step 7 only,
go to step 12.
PictBridge-compatible
printer
2
Select the item, and press ENTER.
Select a file, and press ENTER.
A check mark appears in the check box
by the selected item.
• To clear the check mark, press ENTER
again.
• To clear all check marks, select
“Single-Mode.”
10 Repeat step 9 to select all files you
want to print.
11 Press ,.
The sub-menu appears.
12 Select “Print,” and press ENTER.
The display asks for confirmation.
13 Select “Start,” and press ENTER.
You can set the paper size and layout.
Refer to the operating instructions
supplied with the printer.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
118
To cancel printing
Press ENTER.
To display the connected printer
Select “Confirm Printer” of “USB” in the
“Options 2” setup (page 142).
To restart the connected USB device
Select “Restart USB Device” of “USB” in
the “Options 2” setup (page 142).
z Hint
Printing options, such as paper size or layout,
differ depending on the printer. For details, refer to
the instructions supplied with the printer.
Photo Album
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
119
For playback
Settings and Adjustments
Dynamic
Produces a bold
dynamic picture by
increasing the picture
contrast and the colour
intensity.
Standard
Displays a standard
picture.
Professional
Displays an original
picture.
Memory1/
Memory2/
Memory3
Your own settings. To
create your own
settings, see “To create
your own setting” on
page 120.
Adjusting Picture
Quality
HDD
+RW
-RVR
-RVideo
-RWVR -RWVideo
DVD
+R
VCD DATA DVD *
DATA CD *
* DivX video file only
You can adjust the picture quality from the
connected equipment, such as a TV or VCR,
and also the picture quality of broadcasts
that the recorder can receive by selecting a
preset setting. You can also adjust the
picture quality by changing detailed settings,
and store up to three settings in the memory.
1
To check the detailed settings for the
selected preset, press DISPLAY.
4
Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode.
For adjusting playback picture quality,
press SYSTEM MENU during
playback.
The System Menu appears.
2
Select “Picture Adjustment,” and
press ENTER.
3
Select a preset setting using </,,
and press ENTER.
To create your own setting
1
Select “Memory1,” “Memory2,” or
“Memory3” in step 3.
2
Select “Detailed Settings,” and press
ENTER.
The display for adjusting detailed
settings appears.
3
Select an item using M/m, and adjust
settings using </,.
For explanation of each setting, see the
tables below.
4
Press SYSTEM MENU to exit.
The setting is automatically stored as the
setting you selected in step 1.
For recording
Tuner
TV broadcast
VCR
Video cassettes
DTV
Digital broadcast
Memory1/
Memory2/
Memory3
Your own settings. To
create your own settings,
see “To create your own
setting” on page 120.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
120
Setting options for recording picture
quality
For details about each setting, see the
explanation of the display.
Prog.
Motion
Cinema
3-D Y/C*
Adjusts the progressive video
signal when “Component
Video Out” is set to
“Progressive” (page 130) or
when using the HDMI
connection.
Select “Motion” for a picture,
including subjects that move
dynamically.
Select “Still” for a picture
with little movement.
Converts the progressive
video signal to match the type
of DVD software that you are
watching when “Component
Video Out” is set to
“Progressive” (page 130) or
when using the HDMI
connection.
Select “Auto” to detect the
software type (Film-based or
Video-based) automatically
and select the appropriate
conversion mode. Normally
select this position.
Select “Off” to fix the
conversion mode to the mode
for Video-based software.
Adjusts the brightness/colour
separation for the video
signals.
Select “Motion” for a picture,
including subjects that move
dynamically.
Select “Still” for a picture
with little movement.
Reduces noise contained in
the luminance element of the
video signal.
CNR*
(chroma
noise
reduction)
Reduces noise contained in
the chroma element of the
video signal.
Detail*
Adjusts the sharpness of
images outlines.
White
AGC*
Turn on for automatic white
level adjustment.
Adjusts the intensity of white.
Black
Enhancer*
Adjusts the intensity of black.
Black
Level*
Selects the black level (setup
level) for the NTSC video
signals.
Select “ON” to set the black
level of the input signals to the
standard level. Normally,
select “OFF” position.
Hue*
Adjusts the colour balance.
Chroma
Level*
Makes the colours deeper or
lighter.
* For analogue broadcasting only
Setting options for playback picture
quality
For details about each setting, see the
explanation of the display.
Prog.
Motion
Adjusts the progressive video
signal when “Component
Video Out” is set to
“Progressive” (page 130) or
when “Screen Resolution” is
set to other than “720 x 576i”
(or “720 x 480i”) (page 139).
Select “Motion” for a picture,
including subjects that move
dynamically.
Select “Still” for a picture
with little movement.
Cinema
Converts the progressive
video signal to match the type
of DVD software that you are
watching when “Component
Video Out” is set to
“Progressive” (page 130) or
when “Screen Resolution” is
set to other than “720 x 576i”
(or “720 x 480i”) (page 139).
Select “Auto1” to
automatically detect the
software type (Film-based or
Video-based) and select the
appropriate conversion mode.
Normally select this position.
If the picture appears
unnatural, select “Auto2,”
“On,” or “Off.”
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Settings and Adjustments
YNR*
(luminance
noise
reduction)
White
Enhancer*
121
YNR
(luminance
noise
reduction)
Reduces noise contained in
the luminance element of the
video signal.
BNR (block
noise
reduction)
Reduces “block noise” or
mosaic-like patterns in the
picture.
MNR
(mosquito
noise
reduction)
Reduces the faint noise
appearing around the outlines
of the images. The noise
reduction effects are
automatically adjusted within
each setting range according
to the video bit rate and other
factors.
Sharpness
Sharpens the outlines of the
images.
Detail
Adjusts the sharpness of
images outlines.
White
Enhancer
Adjusts the intensity of white.
Black
Enhancer
Adjusts the intensity of black.
Black
Level
Selects the black level (setup
level) for the video signals.
Select “ON” to raise the black
level. Select this when the
picture appears too dark.
Select “OFF” to set the black
level of the input signals to the
standard level. Normally,
select this position.
Gamma
Correction
Adjusts how dark areas look.
Hue
Adjusts the colour balance.
Chroma
Level
Makes the colours deeper or
lighter.
b Notes
• If the outlines of the images on your screen
become blurred, set “BNR” and/or “MNR” to
“Off.”
• Depending on the disc or the scene being played,
the above BNR or MNR effects may be hard to
discern. Also, these functions may not work with
some screen sizes.
• The following settings are not available for the
signals output from the HDMI jack.
– “Sharpness”
– “White Enhancer”
– “Black Enhancer”
– “Black Level”
– “Gamma Correction”
– “Hue”
– “Chroma Level”
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
122
Using the Setup Menus
You can change the settings of the recorder,
such as picture quality settings, audio
settings, etc.
1
Press SYSTEM MENU while the
recorder is in stop mode.
2
Select “Disc Setup” or “Initial
Setup” using M/m, and press ENTER.
3
Select the desired setup item using
M/m, then press ENTER.
See the explanations in the following
sections.
The default settings are underlined.
Disc Settings (Disc
Setup)
You can adjust DVD related settings.
Basic
Input Disc Name
You can label a disc.
For details, see page 45.
Protect Disc
You can protect a disc against erasure.
For details, see page 45.
Format DVD-RW (DVD-RW only)
The recorder automatically starts formatting
in VR mode or Video mode, whichever is
selected below, when a new, unformatted
DVD-RW is inserted.
VR Mode
Automatically formats the
disc in VR mode.
Video
Mode
Automatically formats the
disc in Video mode.
Format
You can manually re-format a DVD+RW,
DVD-RW, or DVD-R disc to make a blank
disc.
For details, see page 49.
Finalise
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Settings and Adjustments
Finalises a disc to play it on other DVD
equipment.
For details, see page 46.
123
Optimise HDD
As you record, erase and edit recordings
repeatedly, the HDD file system gradually
becomes fragmented. To ‘clean up’ all the
fragmented files, optimise the HDD
periodically. When the HDD needs
optimising, a message recommending
optimisation will appear automatically.
To cancel optimisation, press ENTER. The
HDD will be partly optimised.
b Notes
• It will take about eight hours to optimise the
HDD. During optimisation, other operations,
such as recording or playback, cannot be
performed.
• You cannot optimise the HDD when the HDD
disc space is insufficient for optimising. Erase
titles to open up disc space (page 83).
Recorder Settings
(Basic)
You can make clock and other recorderrelated settings.
Clock Setting
The recorder will automatically set the clock
when any digital channels have been
scanned and stored.
Auto (Auto Clock Set)
Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when
a programme position in your local area
broadcasts a time signal.
1
Press </, repeatedly until the
programme position of the station that
carries a time signal appears.
2
Press m to select “Start,” and press
ENTER.
• If the recorder does not receive a time
signal from any station, press
O RETURN and set the clock
manually.
• If the Auto Clock Set function did not
set the clock correctly for your local
area, try another station for the Auto
Clock Set function or set the clock
manually.
Format HDD.
You can format the HDD and resolve the
problem when the hard disk error occurred.
“Format HDD.” can be selected only when
the hard disk needs formatting. Note that all
of the recorded content on the HDD will be
erased.
Manual (Manual Clock Set)
Set the clock manually.
1
Press </, to select the time zone for
your area or GMT (Greenwich Mean
Time), and press m.
2
Select “On” using </, if you are now
on summer time, and press ENTER.
3
Set the day, month, year, hour, and
minutes using </M/m/,, and press
ENTER to start the clock.
To change the numbers, press < to
return to the item to be changed, and
press M/m.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
124
Input Line System
Selects the colour system when recording
from the connected equipment.
This setting is effective only when recording
from an external input.
NTSC
Records in NTSC or PAL-60
colour system.
PAL/
SECAM
Records in PAL or SECAM
colour system.
b Notes
• When picture noise appears after you change the
“Input Line System” setting, change the “Input
Colour System” setting (page 130). If picture
noise still appears, hold down x (stop) on the
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder.
• When you change the “Input Line System”
setting, the Dubbing List is erased.
Power Save
Selects whether this recorder is in power
save mode when the power is turned off
(standby).
Mode 1
Only aerial input signals are
output to the connected TV
when the recorder is in
standby.
Mode 2
No input signals are output
when the recorder is in
standby.
Off
Does not set to power save
mode. Normally, select this
setting.
HELP Setting
On
Displays Help information for
GUI displays.
Off
Does not set to HELP setting
mode.
EPG Type Select
Selects the EPG (Electronic Programme
Guide) type to use.
The default setting varies depending on the
country/region.
GUIDE
Plus+
Select this to use the Gemstar
GUIDE Plus+ electronic
programme guide (page 61).
Guide
(Digital)
Select this to use the digital
electronic programme guide
(page 50).
Easy Setup (Resetting the
Recorder)
Select this to run the “Easy Setup”
programme.
Follow the instructions for “Easy Setup”
(page 30) from step 2.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
Settings and Adjustments
b Note
Power Save mode does not function in the
following cases, even when “Power Save” is set to
“Mode 1” or “Mode 2.”
– There is a timer setting with “VPS / PDC” in the
schedule list or Timer List.
– The SMARTLINK features are not available
when “Power Save” is set to “Mode 1” or “Mode
2.”
125
Aerial Reception
Settings (Digital Tuner)
You can make digital tuner and programme
position settings for the recorder.
Channel Sort
After the programme positions have been
set, you can change the order of each
programme position in the displayed list.
1
Press M/m to select a programme
position you want to move, and press
ENTER.
• To display other pages, press M/m
repeatedly.
Scans available digital channels, and
replaces all the channels already stored in
the channel list with the scanned results.
Select your country/region using </,,
and press ENTER.
The recorder scans available digital channels
and stores them.
To cancel the scan, press SYSTEM MENU
or EXIT.
If any programme positions are unused or
contain unwanted channels, you can disable
them (page 126).
2
Press M/m to select the programme
position number to swap for the one
selected in step 1, and press ENTER.
The programme position numbers are
swapped.
• To move other programme positions,
repeat from step 1.
b Note
The timer settings for the replaced channels are
deleted.
1
Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
To set a password, see page 138.
2
Select the programme position you want
to skip or lock using M/m, and press
ENTER.
3
Select an option, and press ENTER.
• To skip the programme position, select
.
• To lock the programme position,
select .
A check mark appears in the check box
next to the selected programme position.
Replace Channels
Channel Options
You can skip or lock certain channels.
Add New Channels
Scans digital channels and adds found
channels to the channel list.
Auto Skip
Selects whether to skip radio or data
channels.
Off
No channels are skipped.
Radio
Radio channels are skipped.
Data
Data channels are skipped.
Radio &
Data
Radio and data channels are
skipped when selecting
channels.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
126
Signal Check
You can check the signal strength and
quality of the channel.
To scan a digital channel, select a channel
using </,, and select “Add New
Channels,” then press ENTER.
Aerial Power (RDR-HXD795/
HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095
(except models for the UK)
only)
Selects whether to supply the power to the
aerial connected to the DIGITAL AERIAL
IN jack.
On
The power is always supplied
to the aerial connected to the
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack.
Auto
The power is supplied to the
aerial connected to the
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack
when the recorder is turned
on.
Off
The power is not supplied to
the aerial connected to the
DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack.
b Note
If the setting keeps reverting to “Off” even when
“On” or “Auto” is selected or broadcast signals
cannot be received properly, check the
connections and try to reset the setting.
Aerial Reception
Settings (Analog Tuner)
You can make analogue tuner and
programme position settings for the
recorder.
Auto Channel Setting
Auto Scan
If you connect a TV to this recorder not
using SMARTLINK, you can preset
programme positions automatically using
“Auto Scan.”
Select your country/region using </,,
and press ENTER.
The programme position order will be set
according to the country/region you set.
If any programme positions are unused or
contain unwanted channels, you can disable
them (page 128).
Download from TV
If you connect a TV to this recorder with
SMARTLINK, you can preset programme
positions by downloading from your TV.
For details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with your TV.
Select your country/region using </,,
and press ENTER.
The tuner preset data will be downloaded
from your TV to this recorder.
If any programme positions are unused or
contain unwanted channels, you can disable
them (page 128).
D.TV Language
Settings and Adjustments
Selects main and sub audio/subtitle
languages or teletext language for bilingual
programmes.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
127
Manual CH Setting
Presets programme positions manually.
If some programme positions could not be
set using the “Easy Setup” function, you can
set them manually.
If there is no sound or if the picture is
distorted, the wrong tuner system may have
been preset during “Easy Setup.” Set the
correct tuner system manually in the steps
below.
1
Select your country/region using </
,, and press ENTER.
Programme position
CH System
Select the region to get the best broadcast
reception.
FR
Select this when in France.
Western
Euro
Select this when in West
European countries.
UK & IE
Select this when in Great
Britain/Ireland.
Eastern
Euro
Select this when in East
European countries.
Channel
Press </, repeatedly until the
programme position you want is displayed.
• To select a cable or satellite programme
position, press </, until the
programme position you want is displayed.
Receivable channels
TV system
2
Press PROG +/– to select the
programme position.
3
Select the item you want to change using
M/m, and change the settings using </
,, then press ENTER.
• To preset another programme position,
repeat from step 2.
S1 – S20 CATV
S21 – S41 HYPER
S01 – S05 CATV
DK (East European
Countries)
Skip
On
Channel coverage
BG (West European E2 – E12 VHF
Countries, except
Italian A – H VHF
those listed below)
E21 – E69 UHF
R1 – R12 VHF
R21 – R69 UHF
S1 – S20 CATV
Select this when the
programme position is unused
or contains unwanted
programme positions.
The selected position will be
skipped when you press
PROG +/–.
S21 – S41 HYPER
S01 – S05 CATV
I (Great Britain/
Ireland)
Ireland A – J VHF
South Africa 4 – 11, 13
VHF
B21 – B69 UHF
Off
Does not skip the selected
programme position.
S1 – S20 CATV
S21 – S41 HYPER
S01 – S05 CATV
L* (France)
F2 – F10 VHF
F21 – F69 UHF
B – Q CATV
S21 – S41 HYPER
* To receive broadcasts in France, select “L.”
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
128
Tuning the French CATV channels
This recorder can scan the CATV channels
B to Q and the HYPER frequency channels
S21 to S41. On the Channel Set menu, the
channels are indicated as CC1 to CC44. For
example, channel B is indicated by Channel
Set number CC1, and channel Q is indicated
by Channel Set number CC23 (see the table
below). If the CATV channel you want to
preset is indicated by its frequency (for
example, 152.75 MHz), refer to the table
below to find the corresponding channel
number.
Corresponding
channel
Channel
Set
number
Corresponding
channel
Channel
Set
number
Receivable
Frequency
range (MHz)
S25
CC28
331.25–339.25
S26
CC29
339.25–347.25
S27
CC30
347.25–355.25
S28
CC31
355.25–363.25
S29
CC32
363.25–371.25
S30
CC33
371.25–379.25
S31
CC34
379.25–387.25
S32
CC35
387.25–395.25
S33
CC36
395.25–403.25
S34
CC37
403.25–411.25
S35
CC38
411.25–419.25
S36
CC39
419.25–427.25
S37
CC40
427.25–435.25
S38
CC41
435.25–443.25
S39
CC42
443.25–451.25
S40
CC43
451.25–459.25
S41
CC44
459.25–467.25
Receivable
Frequency
range (MHz)
B
CC1
116.75–124.75
C
CC2
124.75–132.75
D
CC3
132.75–140.75
D
CC4
140.75–148.75
E
CC5
148.75–156.75
F
CC6
156.75–164.75
F
CC7
164.75–172.75
G
CC8
172.75–180.75
H
CC9
180.75–188.75
H
CC10
188.75–196.75
I
CC11
196.75–204.75
J
CC12
204.75–212.75
CC13
212.75–220.75
CC14
220.75–228.75
L
CC15
228.75–236.75
L
CC16
236.75–244.75
M
CC17
244.75–252.75
N
CC18
252.75–260.75
N
CC19
260.75–268.75
O
CC20
268.75–276.75
P
CC21
276.75–284.75
P
CC22
284.75–292.75
Q
CC23
292.75–300.75
S21
CC24
299.25–307.25
S22
CC25
307.25–315.25
S23
CC26
315.25–323.25
S24
CC27
323.25–331.25
On
Turns on the Auto Fine
Tuning function.
Normally select this position.
Off
Allows you to adjust the
picture manually.
• If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not
work effectively, select “Off” and press m.
Press </, to obtain a clearer picture,
and press ENTER.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
Settings and Adjustments
J
K
AFT
,continued
129
Sound System
Select an available TV system (page 128).
B/G
Select this when in West
European countries, except
those listed in “Receivable
channels” on page 128.
D/K
Select this when in East
European countries.
I
Select this when in Great
Britain/Ireland.
L
Select this when in France.
Name
Changes or enters a new station name (up to
5 characters). The recorder must receive
programme position information (e.g.,
SMARTLINK information) for station
names to appear automatically.
Press ,, then press </, repeatedly to
select a character.
To change the characters, press M/m to
move the cursor, and press </,.
Decoder
Video Settings (Video In/
Out)
You can adjust items related to the image,
such as size and colour, according to the type
of TV, tuner, or decoder connected to the
recorder.
Input Colour System
Selects the colour system when picture noise
appears after you change the “Input Line
System” setting (page 125).
Auto
Recorder automatically
detects signals of colour
systems and selects the
appropriate colour system.
PAL
Selects the PAL colour
system when “Input Line
System” is set to “PAL/
SECAM.”
SECAM
Selects the SECAM colour
system when “Input Line
System” is set to “PAL/
SECAM.”
Sets the external decoder (PAY-TV/Canal
Plus analogue decoder) channels.
For details, see page 37.
Channel Swapping
After the programme positions have been
set, you can change the order of each
programme position in the display list.
1
2
Press M/m to select the programme
position number you want to swap, and
press ,.
• To display other pages, press ./
> repeatedly.
Press M/m to select the programme
position number to swap for the one
selected in step 1, and press ENTER.
The programme position numbers are
swapped.
• To swap the programme position
number of another station, repeat from
step 1.
z Hint
When “Input Line System” is set to “NTSC,” you
can select “Auto,” “3.58NTSC,” or “PAL-60.”
b Note
“Input Colour System” cannot be set when
viewing digital broadcasts.
Component Video Out
Selects the signal format in which the
recorder outputs video signals: interlace or
progressive, from the COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT jacks.
Normal(Interlace)
Outputs signals in the
interlace format.
Progressive
Outputs signals in the
progressive format. Select
this when you want to view
progressive signals.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
130
b Notes
• When you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” you
cannot set “Component Video Out.”
• When you connect the recorder to a monitor or
projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT jacks, do not set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB.”
If you set “LINE 3 Out” to “RGB,” in this case,
the picture may not appear.
• When picture noise appears after you set the
recorder to progressive format, hold down x
(stop) on the recorder, and press Z (open/close)
on the recorder.
• No video signals are output when using the
HDMI connection.
LINE 1 In
Selects a method of inputting video signals
for the LINE 1/DECODER jack. The picture
will not be clear if this setting does not
match the type of video input signal.
Video
Inputs video signals.
S-Video
Inputs S-video signals.
RGB
Inputs RGB signals.
Decoder
Select this when
connecting to an external
decoder (PAY-TV/Canal
Plus analogue decoder). If
you connect to a cable box/
satellite receiver such as
CanalSat, do not select this
option.
LINE 3 Out
Selects a method of outputting video signals
for the LINE 3 – TV jack.
Video
Outputs video signals.
S-Video
Outputs S-video signals.
RGB
Outputs RGB signals.
b Notes
• If your TV does not accept S-video or RGB
signals, the image will not be displayed in the
selected method on the TV screen even if you
select “S-Video” or “RGB.” Refer to the
instructions supplied with your TV.
• SMARTLINK is available only when “Video” is
selected.
• RGB signals are not output when using the
HDMI connection.
NTSC on PAL TV
Sets the recorder to convert signals of the
NTSC colour system to the PAL colour
system to play NTSC discs on PAL-only
TVs. Refer to the operating instructions
supplied with your TV.
On
Plays NTSC discs on PALonly TVs.
Off
Select this if the connected
TV is a multi-system
(NTSC-compatible) TV.
Settings and Adjustments
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
131
b Note
Audio Input Settings
(Audio In)
You can adjust the sound according to the
playback and connection conditions.
When receiving audio input signals from the DV
input jack, the recorder automatically selects
“Stereo” or “Bilingual” regardless of the “External
Audio” setting.
Bilingual Recording
Selects the sound to be recorded.
NICAM Select
A/L
Records the main sound
for the bilingual
programme.
B/R
Records the sub sound
for the bilingual
programme.
For details on NICAM system, see page 70.
NICAM
Normally select this
position.
Standard
Select this if the sound
from NICAM broadcasts is
not clear.
Analog Tuner Level
If the playback sound is distorted, set this
item to “Compression.” The recorder
reduces the audio output level.
This function affects the output of the
following jacks:
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks
– LINE 3 – TV jack
– LINE 1/DECODER jack
Normal
Normally select this
position.
Compression
Select this when the
playback sound from the
speakers is distorted.
External Audio
Stereo
Bilingual
Select this when
receiving stereo
programmes from
connected equipment.
Select this when
receiving bilingual
programmes from
connected equipment.
b Notes
• When recording a bilingual audio signal to the
HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is set to
“Video Mode Off” (page 137) (except in PCM
mode)) or a DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode
(except in PCM mode), both audio channels are
recorded and you can select the sound when
playing.
• Bilingual audio streams cannot be recorded
simultaneously from digital broadcasts.
DV Input
Select the setting for the audio input when
DV camcorder dubbing.
Select “Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)”/“Mix (Stereo
1: 50 %)”/“Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)” or “Stereo
2” only if you have added a second audio
when recording with your digital video
camera.
Stereo 1
Records original
sound only.
Normally select
this when dubbing
a DV format tape.
Stereo 2
Records additional
audio only.
Mix (Stereo 1: 75 %)
Mix (Stereo 1: 50 %)
Mix (Stereo 1: 25 %)
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
132
Records both stereo
1 and 2.
b Note
Audio Output Settings
(Audio Out)
You can switch the method of outputting
audio signals when you connect a
component such as an amplifier (receiver)
with a digital input jack.
b Note
If you connect a component that does not accept
the selected audio signal, a loud noise (or no
sound) will come from the speakers, and may
affect your ears or cause speaker damage.
When HDMI output is performed to equipment not
compatible with DTS signals, the signals will not
be output regardless of the “DTS Output” setting.
96 kHz PCM Output (DVD
VIDEOs only)
Selects the sampling frequency of the audio
signal.
96 kHz ->
48 kHz
The audio signals of DVD
VIDEOs are converted to
48 kHz and output.
96 kHz
All signals containing
96 kHz are output without
conversion. However, the
signals are output at
48 kHz if copyrightprotected signals are
contained.
Dolby Digital Output (HDD/
DVDs only)
Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
-> PCM
Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
audio component with a
built-in Dolby Digital
decoder.
Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
audio component lacking a
built-in Dolby Digital
decoder.
b Note
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment
not compatible with Dolby Digital signals, the
PCM signals will be automatically output even
when you select “Dolby Digital.”
b Notes
• “96 kHz PCM Output” setting has no effect
when audio signals are output from the LINE 2
OUT (R-AUDIO-L) jacks or LINE 3 – TV/LINE
1/DECODER jack. If the sampling frequency is
96 kHz, signals are simply converted to
analogue signals and output.
• If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to
equipment not compatible with 96 kHz signals,
48 kHz PCM will be automatically output even
when you select “96 kHz.”
MPEG Output (DVD VIDEOs
only)
Selects the type of MPEG audio signal.
MPEG
Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
audio component with a
built-in MPEG decoder.
MPEG ->
PCM
Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
audio component without a
built-in MPEG decoder. If
you play MPEG audio
sound tracks, the recorder
outputs stereo signals via
the DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
Selects whether or not to output DTS
signals.
On
Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
audio component with a
built-in DTS decoder.
Off
Select this when the
recorder is connected to an
audio component without a
built-in DTS decoder.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Settings and Adjustments
DTS Output (DVD VIDEOs only)
133
b Note
If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment
not compatible with MPEG audio signals, the
PCM signals will be automatically output even
when you select “MPEG.”
Language Settings
(Language)
You can make language settings.
Audio DRC (Dynamic Range
Control) (DVDs only)
Selects the dynamic range (difference
between soft and loud sounds) setting when
playing a DVD that conforms to “Audio
DRC.” This affects the output from the
following jacks:
– LINE 2 OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks
– LINE 3 – TV jack
– LINE 1/DECODER jack
– DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI OUT
jack only when “Dolby Digital Output” is
set to “Dolby Digital -> PCM” (page 133).
On
Off
Makes low sounds clear
even if you turn the volume
down.
Normally select this
position.
OSD Language
Switches the display language on the screen.
Audio Language (DVD VIDEO
only)
Switches the language of the sound track.
Subtitle Language (DVD VIDEO
only)
Switches the language of the subtitles
recorded on the disc.
Auto Language
The “Auto Language” function is available
when “Audio Language” and “Subtitle
Language” are set to the same language, and
“Subtitle Display” is set to “On.”
On
For DVD VIDEOs whose
main audio track is the
language you set in “Audio
Language” and “Subtitle
Language,” the recorder
plays the main audio track
without subtitles.
For DVD VIDEOs whose
main audio track is not the
language you set in “Audio
Language” and “Subtitle
Language,” the recorder
plays the main audio track
with subtitles in the
language you set.
Off
Turns off the function.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
134
DVD Menu Language (DVD
VIDEO only)
Switches the language for the DVD menu.
Select “w/Subtitle Language” to set the
same language as the language you set in
“Subtitle Language.”
Recording Settings
(Recording)
You can adjust recording settings.
Manual Rec. Mode
Subtitle Display
On
Displays subtitles.
Off
Does not display subtitles.
Assist Subtitle Displays special assistive
subtitles, where available.
z Hint
If you select “Others” in “Audio Language,”
“Subtitle Language,” or “DVD Menu Language,”
press m, and enter a language code from
“Language Code List” on page 158.
b Note
If you select a language in “DVD Menu
Language,” “Subtitle Language,” or “Audio
Language” that is not recorded on the DVD
VIDEO, one of the recorded languages will be
automatically selected.
You can select further options for recording
mode (manual recording mode). The default
setting is “Off” (standard recording mode).
You can check the approximate recording
times for the HDD and the different DVD
types in each recording mode on page 155.
1
Select “On (go to setup)” using M/m,
and press ENTER.
2
Select a recording mode using </,,
and press ENTER.
To easily select a manual recording
mode, press REC MODE repeatedly to
display “MN,” and select a manual
recording mode using </,.
Rec. Mode Adjust
On
Automatically adjusts the
recording mode to enable
the entire programme to be
recorded (page 68).
Off
Turns off the function.
Subtitle Recording
Records digital broadcast
subtitles.
Off
No digital broadcast
subtitles are recorded.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Settings and Adjustments
On
135
Set Thumbnail
Selects a scene for the thumbnail picture
shown in the Title List.
0 seconds
The first frame of the title
is set for the thumbnail
picture.
30 seconds
The frame at 30 seconds
from the first frame is set
for the thumbnail picture.
3 minutes
The frame at 3 minutes
from the first frame is set
for the thumbnail picture.
Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) (HDD/
DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode
only)
On
Off
The recorder detects
changes in the picture and
sound and automatically
inserts chapter marks (up
to 99 chapters for one title
recorded on the HDD).
Auto Chapter (Video) (DVD-RW/
DVD-R in Video mode only)
No
Separation
No chapter mark is
inserted.
10 minutes
Inserts chapter marks at
approximately 10-minute
intervals.
15 minutes
Inserts chapter marks at
approximately 15-minute
intervals.
Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)
(DVD+RW/DVD+R only)
No
Separation
No chapter mark is
inserted.
10 minutes
Inserts chapter marks at
approximately 10-minute
intervals.
15 minutes
Inserts chapter marks at
approximately 15-minute
intervals.
No chapter mark is
inserted.
b Notes
• The actual chapter mark interval may vary
depending on the amount of information
contained in the video to be recorded.
• Chapter marks are automatically inserted, where
the date or time information changes on the tape,
when “Auto Chapter (HDD/VR)” is set to “On”
during DV dubbing to the HDD or a DVD-RW/
DVD-R (VR mode).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
136
HDD Recording Format
Selects the HDD recording format.
Video Mode
Off
Video Mode
On
Records to the HDD in VR
mode.
When recording stereo and
bilingual programmes,
both main and sub sounds
can be recorded.
Records to the HDD in
Video mode.
When recording stereo and
bilingual programmes,
only one sound track (main
or sub) can be recorded.
Set “Bilingual Recording”
to “A/L” (default) or “B/R”
in the “Audio In” setup
(page 132).
Playback Settings
(Playback)
You can adjust playback settings.
TV Type
Select the playback picture size according to
the type of connected TV (widescreen/wide
mode TV or conventional 4:3 screen TV).
4:3 Letter Box Select this when
connecting to a 4:3 screen
TV. Displays a wide
picture with bands on the
upper and lower portions
of the screen.
4:3 Pan Scan
Select this when
connecting to a 4:3 screen
TV. Automatically
displays a wide picture on
the entire screen and cuts
off the portions that do not
fit.
16:9
Select this when
connecting to a widescreen
TV or TV with a wide
mode function.
z Hint
The HDD contents recorded in Video mode can be
dubbed to a disc at high speed (page 89).
b Note
Bilingual audio streams cannot be recorded
simultaneously from digital broadcasts.
4:3 Letter Box
4:3 Pan Scan
b Note
Depending on the disc, “4:3 Letter Box” may be
selected automatically instead of “4:3 Pan Scan”
or vice-versa.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Settings and Adjustments
16:9
137
Pause Mode
Selects the picture quality in pause mode.
Field
Outputs a stable, generally
shake-free image.
Frame
Outputs a sharp image, but
may be prone to shake.
Auto
Outputs a generally less
sharp but more stable still
image.
Seamless Playback (HDD/
DVD-RW/DVD-R in VR mode
only)
On
Playback is smooth, but
with a trade-off against the
accuracy of the edit points.
Off
You may notice
momentary interruption at
edited points during
playback of a VR mode
Playlist.
Angle Indicator (DVD VIDEOs
only)
Limitation Settings
(Parental Lock)
You can set the password and limit the
operations.
Set Password/Change
Password
You can set or change password that gives
access to the “Channel Options” settings in
the “Digital Tuner” setup and the “Parental
Lock” settings.
Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
To change the password, enter your fourdigit password in the “Current Password”
row using the number buttons, and press
ENTER. Then enter a new password in the
“New Password” row using the number
buttons.
The password setting/password changing
setting is completed.
b Note
If you forgot your password, reset the recorder
(page 150).
DVD Playback (DVD VIDEO
only)
On
Displays “
” on the TV
screen if various angles
(multi-angles) for a scene
are recorded on the disc.
Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be
limited according to a predetermined level,
such as the age of the users. Scenes may be
blocked or replaced with different scenes.
Off
Does not display “
the TV screen.
1
Select “Standard,” and press ENTER.
2
Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
” on
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
138
3
Select “Code” (geographic area) as the
playback limitation level, and press
ENTER.
The area is selected.
• When you select “Number,” press the
number buttons to select and enter a
country/area code in the table
(page 158), and press ENTER.
4
Select “Change Level,” and press
ENTER.
5
Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
6
Select the level.
The lower the value, the stricter the
limitation.
Discs rated higher than the selected
level will be restricted.
7
Press ENTER.
The DVD Playback setting is
completed.
To cancel the DVD Playback setting for
the disc, select “Off” in step 6.
D.TV Age Limit
Viewing of some digital TV programmes
can be limited according to the age limit you
set. To watch programmes that exceed the
age limit you set, your password is required.
When recording a locked programme, the
“D.TV Age Limit” setting is automatically
cancelled and the programme can be viewed.
In addition, you can watch the recorded title
without having to enter a password.
(for customers in France/Denmark/Finland,
or Sweden only)
Enter your four-digit password using the
number buttons, and press ENTER.
2
Select an age as limitation level, and
press ENTER.
The setting is completed.
To cancel the setting, select “Off.”
You can adjust items related to the HDMI
connection.
b Note
You can select “HDMI Output” only when
connecting equipment to the HDMI OUT jack.
Screen Resolution
Selects the type of video signals output from
the HDMI OUT jack. If the picture is not
clear, natural or to your satisfaction, try
another option that suits the disc and your
TV/projector, etc. For details, refer also to
the instruction manual supplied with the TV/
projector, etc.
1920 x 1080p
Sends 1920×1080p video
signals.
1920 x 1080i
Sends 1920×1080i video
signals.
1280 x 720p
Sends 1280×720p video
signals.
720 x 576p*1
Sends 720×576p video
signals.
720 x 480p*2
Sends 720×480p video
signals.
720 x 576i*1
Sends 720×576i video
signals.
720 x 480i*2
Sends 720×480i video
signals.
*1
Can be selected only when “Input Line System”
is set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup
(page 125).
*2 Can be selected only when “Input Line System”
is set to “NTSC” in the “Basic” setup
(page 125).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Settings and Adjustments
1
HDMI Settings (HDMI
Output)
139
b Notes
• When picture noise appears after you change the
“Screen Resolution” setting, hold down x (stop)
on the recorder, and press Z (open/close) on the
recorder.
• When “Colour” is set to “YCbCr 4:2:2” in the
“HDMI Output” setup, you cannot select “720 x
576i” (or “720 x 480i”).
4:3 Video Output
This setting is effective only when you set
“TV Type” to “16:9” in the “Playback”
setup.
Adjust this setting to watch 4:3 aspect ratio
signals. If you can change the aspect ratio on
your TV, change the setting on your TV, not
this recorder.
Note that this setting is effective only for
HDMI connection.
Full
Select this when you can
change the aspect ratio on
your TV.
Normal
Select this when you
cannot change the aspect
ratio on your TV. Shows a
4:3 size video with the
aspect ratio as it is.
16:9 aspect ratio TV
Colour
Selects the method of outputting video
signals for the HDMI jack.
RGB (0-255)
RGB (16-235)
Outputs RGB (0-255)
signals. Select this when
connecting to an RGB (0255) device.
Outputs RGB (16-235)
signals. Select this if
colours appear overly
rich and the black
appears too deep.
YCbCr 4:2:2
Outputs 10-bit YCbCr
4:2:2 component signals.
YCbCr 4:4:4
Outputs 8-bit YCbCr
4:4:4 component signals.
b Notes
• Some settings may not be available depending
on the connected device.
• When a DVI device is connected, you cannot
select “YCbCr 4:2:2” or “YCbCr 4:4:4.”
• When “Screen Resolution” is set to “720 x 576i”
(or “720 x 480i”) in the “HDMI Output” setup,
you cannot select “YCbCr 4:2:2.”
Audio Output
Selects the type of audio signal output from
the HDMI OUT jack.
Auto
Outputs Dolby Digital,
MPEG and DTS audio
signals as a bitstream
signal. Normally select
this position.
PCM
Converts all audio
signals except for DTS
signals to PCM.
Bitstream
Priority
Select this if the
connected device is
compatible with
bitstream audio.
b Notes
• The PCM signals may not be output even when
you select “Auto” depending on the “Audio Out”
settings, number of audio channels, and the
HDMI-connected device.
• The “Audio Output” function is not available
when a DVI device is connected.
Control for HDMI
On
Allows you to use the
“Control for HDMI”
function (page 24).
Off
Turns off the function.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
140
2
Other Settings (Options)
You can make other operation settings.
On Screen Display
On
Automatically displays
information on the screen
when the recorder is turned
on, etc.
Off
Displays information only
when DISPLAY is
pressed.
Front Panel Display
Adjusts the lighting of the front panel
display.
On
Bright lighting.
Off
Turns off the lighting and
saves power consumption
when the power is off.
Command Mode
Changes the Command Mode of the
recorder to avoid interference with your
other Sony DVD recorder or player.
1
Select a Command Mode (“1,” “2,” or
“3 (Default setting)”), and press
ENTER.
z Hint
You can check the Command Mode for the
recorder in the front panel display (page 15).
When the Command Mode is set to “3 (Default
setting),” “1” or “2” does not appear.
SMARTLINK
This Recorder Allows you to use the
Only
SMARTLINK function
with the recorder when the
recorder is in standby
mode.
Pass Through Allows you to use the
SMARTLINK function
with the connected
equipment when the
recorder is in standby
mode.
b Note
Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the “Basic” setup
(page 125) to set “SMARTLINK” to “Pass
Through.”
DivX
Registration Code
Displays the registration code of DivX video
files for this recorder.
For more information, go to http://
www.divx.com/vod on the Internet.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Settings and Adjustments
b Note
The default command mode setting for this
recorder and the supplied remote is “3
(Default setting).”
The remote does not function if different
command modes are set for the recorder and
remote. Set the same command mode.
Set the Command Mode for the remote
so it matches the Command Mode for
the recorder you set above.
Follow the steps below to set the
Command Mode on the remote.
1 Hold down ENTER.
2 While holding down ENTER, enter
the Command Mode code number
using the number buttons.
3 Hold down both the number and
ENTER buttons at the same time for
more than three seconds.
141
Set Preview (HDD only)
Selects the thumbnail type shown in the Title
List.
Quick
Preview
Plays short excerpts from
throughout the selected
title.
Normal
Plays the selected title
from the beginning.
CI Information (RDR-HXD795/
HXD895/HXD995/HXD1095
only)
You can see the CI information. The
displayed information differs depending on
the CI module.
Software Update
You can check the current software version
of the built-in digital tuner and keep it up to
date with the latest software.
Manual Update
Updates the software manually.
To cancel, press SYSTEM MENU.
The new software will be available next time
the recorder is turned on.
Auto Update
On
Updates the software
automatically. Normally,
select this position.
Off
Does not update the
software automatically.
Other Settings
(Options 2)
You can make other operation settings.
USB
Restart USB Device
Restarts the connected USB device if it does
not respond to the recorder. If the connected
USB device still does not work properly, try
following:
– Turn the connected USB device off and on
again.
– Disconnect and then connect the USB
cable.
Confirm Printer
Displays the manufacturer and model name
of the printer connected to the recorder. Note
that this function may not work depending
on the printer.
TV Pause
Selects the tuner for the TV Pause (page 79).
TV’s Tuner
Selects this when
connecting the recorder to
your TV using the SCART
jack.
Recorder’s
Tuner
Selects this when
connecting the recorder to
your TV not using the
SCART jack.
Technical Info.
You can check the current hardware and
software versions of the digital tuner.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
142
The power does not turn on.
, If you connect the recorder to your TV via
only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
jacks, set “Component Video Out” in the
“Video In/Out” setup to “Progressive”
(page 130).
, (For RDR-HXD790/HXD890/HXD990/
HXD1090) A scrambled channel is
selected.
, (For RDR-HXD795/HXD895/HXD995/
HXD1095) A scrambled channel is
selected. Insert the proper CAM (page 26).
, A HD (High Definition) programme is
selected.
, A radio channel is selected.
, When playing a double-layer DVD, the
video and audio may be momentarily
interrupted at the point where the layers
switch.
, Check that the mains lead is connected
securely.
Picture noise appears.
Additional Information
Troubleshooting
If you experience any of the following
difficulties while using the recorder, use this
troubleshooting guide to help remedy the
problem before requesting repairs. Should
any problem persist, consult your nearest
Sony dealer.
Power
The power of the recorder turns off at the
same time as the TV is turned off.
, This is caused by the ‘BRAVIA’ Sync
features. Set “Control for HDMI” to “Off”
in the “HDMI Output” setup to cancel this
function (page 140).
Tuner
The channel is not found or stored or
missed.
, Make sure that your aerial is properly
connected to the recorder.
, Confirm with your dealer that you are in an
area that can receive a digital signal.
, Check your aerial installation.
Picture
There is no picture.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Additional Information
, Re-connect all connecting cords securely.
, The connecting cords are damaged.
, Check the connection to your TV
(page 18).
, Switch the input selector on your TV (such
as to “VCR” and “AV 1”) so that the signal
from the recorder appears on the TV
screen.
, Check that the “Video In/Out” setup is set
to the appropriate item that conforms to
your system (page 130).
, If the picture output signal from your
recorder passes through your VCR to get to
your TV, or if you are connected to a
combination TV/VIDEO player, the copyprotection signal applied to some DVD
programmes could affect picture quality. If
you still experience this problem even
when you connect your recorder directly to
your TV, try connecting your recorder to
your TV’s S VIDEO input.
, You have set the recorder to progressive
format even though your TV cannot accept
the progressive signal. In this case, hold
down x (stop) on the recorder, and press
Z (open/close) on the recorder.
, Even if your TV is compatible with
progressive format (525p/625p) signals,
the image may be affected when you set
the recorder to progressive format. In this
case, hold down x (stop) on the recorder,
and press Z (open/close) on the unit and
the recorder is set to normal (interlace)
format.
, You are playing a title recorded in a colour
system that is different from your TV.
, Noise may appear in the pictures recorded
on the HDD, which is due to the
characteristics of HDD, and is not a
malfunction.
, When playing a double-layer DVD, the
video and audio may be momentarily
interrupted at the point where the layers
switch.
143
There is no picture or picture noise
appears when connected to the DV IN
jack.
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off
and on again. 2Turn the connected
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect
and then connect the i.LINK cable again.
There is no picture or picture noise appears
when connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off
and on again. 2Turn the connected
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect
and then connect the HDMI cord again.
, If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video
output, changing the “Screen Resolution”
setting in the “HDMI Output” setup may
solve the problem (page 139). Connect the
TV and the recorder using a video jack
other than HDMI OUT, and switch the
TV’s input to the connected video input so
that you can see the on-screen displays.
Change the “Screen Resolution” setting in
the “HDMI Output” setup, and switch the
TV’s input back to HDMI. If the picture
still does not appear, repeat the steps and
try other options.
, The recorder is connected to an input
device that is not HDCP compliant
(page 22).
, When picture noise appears after you
change the “Screen Resolution” setting,
hold down x (stop) on the recorder, and
press Z (open/close) on the recorder.
TV programme reception does not fill the
screen.
, Set the channel manually in “Manual CH
Setting” in the “Analog Tuner” setup
(page 128).
, Select the correct source using the INPUT
button, or select a channel of any TV
programme using the PROG +/– buttons.
The picture is breaking up.
, The signal strength is low.
, Check aerial installation.
TV programme pictures are distorted.
, Place the recorder and TV farther apart.
, Place the TV and any bunched aerial
cables farther apart.
, The aerial cable is connected to the
AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder.
Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack.
, The recorder’s colour system is different
from your TV. Hold down x (stop) on the
recorder, and press INPUT on the recorder
to change the recorder’s colour system.
TV channels cannot be changed.
, A timer recording started, which changed
the channels.
, The channel is skipped (page 128).
, The Parental Lock is activated (page 138).
The picture from equipment connected to
the recorder’s input jack does not appear
on the screen.
, If the equipment is connected to the LINE
1/DECODER jack, select “L1” in the front
panel display by pressing INPUT.
If the equipment is connected to the LINE
2 IN jacks, select “L2” in the front panel
display by pressing INPUT.
The playback picture or TV programme
from the equipment connected through
the recorder is distorted.
, If the playback picture output from a DVD
player, VCR, or tuner goes through your
recorder before reaching your TV, the
copy-protection signal applied to some
programmes could affect picture quality.
Disconnect the playback equipment in
question and connect it directly to your
TV.
The picture does not fill the screen.
, Set “TV Type” in the “Playback” setup in
accordance with the screen size of your TV
(page 137).
The picture does not fill the screen, even
though the picture size is set in “TV
Type” in the “Playback” setup.
, The picture size of the title is fixed.
, Reorient the TV aerial.
, Adjust the picture (refer to the TV’s
instruction manual).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
144
The picture is black and white.
, Check that “LINE 3 Out” in the “Video In/
Out” setup is set to the appropriate item
that conforms to your system (page 131).
, If you are using a SCART cord, be sure to
use one that is fully wired (21 pins).
GUIDE Plus+ system (in areas
with GUIDE Plus+ only)
GUIDE Plus+ system does not appear.
The programme position number in the
programme listing does not match the
broadcast station.
, There may be more than one channel lineup
for your area. To change the channel lineup,
select “Editor” in the Menu Bar of the
GUIDE Plus+ system (page 65).
Programme listings for some programme
positions are missing.
, The programme guide data may not be
updated. Turn off the recorder and let the
recorder receive the programme guide
data.
, Some broadcast stations support only two
days of data. For details, refer to the
following website:
www.europe.guideplus.com
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be
received because the reception is poor.
The programme listing is not up to date.
, The recorder was in use during the time
that the GUIDE Plus+ data was scheduled
to be downloaded.
, All of the GUIDE Plus+ data could not be
received because the reception is poor.
Sound
There is no sound.
, Re-connect all connections securely.
, The connecting cord is damaged.
, The input source setting on the audio
component or the connection to the audio
component is incorrect.
, The recorder is in reverse play, fastforward, slow motion, or pause mode.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Additional Information
, 1Even if you complete “Easy Setup,” TV
programme listings do not appear until the
recorder receives the GUIDE Plus+ data.
2Turn off the recorder, but do not unplug
it. 3Wait for 24 hours. It may take several
days for the recorder to receive the GUIDE
Plus+ data for all programme positions. If
the recorder does not receive the GUIDE
Plus+ data after 24 hours, set the host
channel manually (page 64).
, The host channel is disabled. Show and
enable the host channel (page 65).
, The timer is set. Cancel the timer setting.
, The clock is incorrect. Set the clock
manually (page 124).
, The country/region or postal code is
incorrect. Correctly set your country/
region and postal code (page 30).
, When the recorder is connected to a set top
box receiver, the set top box receiver must
be turned on to download the GUIDE
Plus+ data.
, If the set top box receiver is connected to
the recorder using a SCART cord only, try
the following: 1Turn on your set top box
receiver. 2Connect the set top box
controller. 3Follow the steps in
“Changing the GUIDE Plus+ host channel
manually (Setup)” (page 64) to set the host
channel manually. Be sure to set your set
top box receiver (tuner) as the source.
, Area numbers that cannot be received
using GUIDE Plus+ are set. Select “Easy
Setup” in the “Basic” setup from “Initial
Setup” in the System Menu, and follow the
on-screen instructions to make the settings
again (page 30).
, The “Time Lock” function on your cable
box is activated. Set this function to off.
, If the host channel has changed or moved,
the programme guide data cannot be
received. In this case, follow the steps in
“Searching for the GUIDE Plus+ host
channel (Setup)” (page 64) to update the
host channel setting. If the problem
persists after waiting for one day, search
for the host channel at the following
website and set the host channel manually
(page 64).
www.europe.guideplus.com
145
, If the audio signal does not come through
the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL)/HDMI
OUT jacks, check the “Audio Out” setup
(page 133).
, The recorder supports only MP3 audio,
Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for DivX
video files. Press AUDIO and select MP3
audio or MPEG audio.
No sound is output from the HDMI OUT
jack.
, Try the following: 1Turn the recorder off
and on again. 2Turn the connected
equipment off and on again. 3Disconnect
and then connect the HDMI cord again.
, The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a
DVI device (DVI jacks do not accept audio
signals).
, The equipment connected to the HDMI
OUT jack does not conform to the audio
signal format. In this case, set “Audio
Output” to “PCM” in the “HDMI Output”
setup (page 140).
Sound distortion occurs.
, Set “Analog Tuner Level” in the “Audio
In” setup to “Compression” (page 132).
Sound is noisy.
, When playing a CD with DTS sound
tracks, noise will come from the LINE 2
OUT R-AUDIO-L jacks, LINE 3 – TV
jack, or LINE 1/DECODER jack
(page 76).
The sound volume is low.
, The sound volume is low on some DVDs.
The sound volume may improve if you set
“Audio DRC” in the “Audio Out” setup to
“On” (page 134).
, Set “Analog Tuner Level” in the “Audio
In” setup to “Normal” (page 132).
An alternate audio track cannot be
recorded or played.
, When recording from connected
equipment, set “External Audio” to
“Bilingual” in the “Audio In” setup
(page 132).
, Multilingual tracks (main and sub) cannot
be recorded on the HDD (when Video
Mode On), DVD+RWs, DVD-RWs
(Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVD-Rs
(Video mode). To record the language, set
“Bilingual Recording” in the “Audio In”
setup to “A/L” or “B/R” before recording
(page 132). To record both the main and
sub sounds on a disc, record on DVDRWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode). To record on
the HDD, set “HDD Recording Format” to
“Video Mode Off” in the “Recording”
setup (page 137).
, If you have connected an audio component
to the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack
and want to change the audio track for the
HDD (when “HDD Recording Format” is
set to “Video Mode Off” in the
“Recording” setup (page 137))/DVDRWs/DVD-Rs (VR mode) during
playback, set “Dolby Digital Output” in
the “Audio Out” setup to “Dolby Digital ->
PCM” (page 133).
, Bilingual audio streams cannot be
recorded simultaneously from digital
broadcasts.
The sound is breaking up.
, The signal strength is low.
, Check aerial installation.
Recording/Timer recording/
Editing
The programme position cannot be
changed from the programme position
you are recording.
, Set the TV’s input source to “TV.”
Recording does not start immediately
after you press z REC.
, Operate the recorder only after “LOAD,”
“FORMAT,” or “INFO WRITE”
disappears from the front panel display.
Nothing was recorded even though you
set the timer setting correctly.
, There was a power failure during
recording.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
146
, The recorder’s internal clock stopped due
to a power failure that lasted for more than
1 hour. Reset the clock (page 124).
, The channel was disabled after the timer
recording was set. See “Manual CH
Setting” on page 128.
, The programme position was hidden after
the timer recording was set. (See
“Disabling programme positions (Editor)”
on page 65.)
, Disconnect the mains lead from the mains,
and connect it again.
, The programme contains copy protection
signals that restrict copying.
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer
setting (page 59, 72).
, There is no DVD inside the recorder.
, There is not enough disc space for the
recording.
, The set top box receiver was turned off.
, The set top box controller was incorrectly
connected (page 18).
, The settings in “Setup” in the Menu bar
have been changed (page 64).
, The recorder was in the process of
dubbing.
, A scrambled channel is selected.
Recording does not stop immediately
after you press x REC STOP.
, It will take a few seconds for the recorder
to input disc data before recording can
stop.
On-screen instructions may appear after
pressing x REC STOP. In this case,
follow the on-screen instructions.
Recording does not stop after you press
x.
, Press x REC STOP.
, There was a power failure during
recording. If the power recovers when
there is a timer recording, the recorder
resumes recording.
Should the power failure continue for more
than 1 hour, reset the clock (page 124).
, Another timer setting overlapped the timer
setting (page 59, 72).
, Disc space was not sufficient.
, The VPS/PDC function is working.
, Data that is not playable on this recorder
but was recorded on a DVD with a PC will
be erased from the disc when the disc is
inserted.
The VPS/PDC function does not operate.
, Check that the clock and date are set
correctly.
, Check that the VPS/PDC time you set is
correct (there might be a mistake in the TV
programme guide). If the broadcast you
wanted to record did not send the correct
VPS/PDC information, the recorder will
not start recording.
, If the reception is poor, the VPS/PDC
signal might be altered and the recorder
might not start recording.
, The VPS/PDC function may not work if
the GUIDE Plus+ host channel setup is not
complete.
, The VPS/PDC function does not work
when the GUIDE Plus+ data is being
downloaded.
Playback
The recorder does not play any type of
disc (except HDD).
, The disc is upside down. Insert the disc
with the labelled side facing up.
, The disc is not correctly inserted.
, Moisture has condensed inside the
recorder. In this case, if the recorder is on,
leave it on (if it is off, leave it off) for about
an hour until the moisture evaporates.
, If the disc was recorded on another
recorder and was not finalised (page 46),
the recorder cannot play the disc.
The recorder does not start playback from
the beginning.
, Resume play was activated (page 74).
, You have inserted a DVD whose Title
menu or DVD menu automatically appears
on the TV screen when it is first inserted.
Use the menu to start playback.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Additional Information
Timer recording is not complete or did
not start from the beginning.
Contents previously recorded were
erased.
147
, The DVD VIDEO features an auto
playback function.
, The angles cannot be changed for the titles
recorded on this recorder.
, The angles cannot be changed during slow
motion playback or when playback is
paused.
Playback stops automatically.
The DivX video files do not play.
The recorder starts playing
automatically.
, If the DVD has an auto pause signal, the
recorder stops playback at the auto pause
signal.
Some functions such as Stop, Search, or
Slow-motion Play cannot be performed.
, Depending on the DVD, you may not be
able to do some of the operations above.
Refer to the instruction manual supplied
with the disc.
The language for the sound track cannot
be changed.
, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the
DVD being played.
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing
of the language for the sound track.
, Try changing the language using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
The subtitle language cannot be changed
or turned off.
, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on
the DVD VIDEO.
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of
the subtitles.
, Try changing the subtitle using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
, The subtitles cannot be changed for the
titles recorded on this recorder.
The angles cannot be changed.
, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD
VIDEO being played.
, You are trying to change the angles when
“
” does not appear on the TV screen
(page 75). To display “
” if various
angles (multi-angles) for a scene are
recorded on the disc, set “Angle Indicator”
to “On” in the “Playback” setup
(page 138).
, The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing
angles.
, Try changing the angle using the DVD
VIDEO’s menu.
, The file is not created in DivX format.
, The file has an extension other than “.avi”
or “.divx.”
, The DATA CD (DivX video)/DATA DVD
(DivX video) is not created in a DivX
format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/
Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or UDF (Universal
Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50, 2.00, or 2.01.
, The DivX video file format is larger than
720 (width) × 576 (height).
The MP3 audio tracks do not play.
, The MP3 audio tracks are not recorded in a
format that the recorder can play
(page 160).
The JPEG image files do not play.
, The JPEG image files are not recorded in a
format that the recorder can play
(page 160).
, Progressive JPEG images cannot be
played.
TV Pause does not work.
, You are recording to the HDD or the HDD
is full.
Dubbing
You dubbed a title, but the title did not
appear in the HDD Title List.
, The title contained a copy protection
signal, so it was moved (page 157).
High-speed dubbing is not possible.
, The title cannot be dubbed at high speed
(page 91). Even if A-B erasure is
performed so that a title does not contain
mixed picture sizes, it is still treated as a
title with mixed picture sizes.
HDD/DVD Dubbing is not possible.
, The title cannot be dubbed (page 90).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
148
HDD camcorder dubbing is not possible.
, An HDD camcorder which is not
supported by this recorder is connected
(page 94).
, The HDD camcorder is not set to the USB
connection mode (page 95).
, The HDD camcorder contains only the
contents that have already been dubbed to
the recorder when you are dubbing using
the ONE-TOUCH DUB button or
“Incremental Dubbing.”
Display
The clock has stopped.
, Set the clock again (page 124).
The clock is wrong.
, Set the clock again (page 124). If you
cannot set the clock, wait until the clock
data is received and the clock is
automatically adjusted.
The timer indicator is flashing.
, The disc does not have enough space.
, Insert a recordable disc into the recorder.
, The inserted DVD is protected (page 45).
The clock does not appear in the front
panel display when the recorder is turned
off.
, “Front Panel Display” is set to “Off” in the
“Options” setup (page 141).
The title or station name is not correctly
displayed.
, In some areas, letters or symbols that the
recorder cannot record or display are
replaced with “*.”
Remote control
The remote does not function.
, Different command modes are set for the
recorder and remote. Set the same
command mode (page 141). The default
command mode setting for this recorder
and the supplied remote is “3 (Default
setting).” You can check the current
command mode in the front panel display
(page 141).
, The batteries are weak.
, The remote is too far from the recorder.
, The remote’s manufacturer code returned
to the default setting when you replaced
the batteries. Reset the code (page 28).
, The remote is not pointed at the remote
sensor on the recorder.
Others
The recorder does not detect a USB
device connected to the recorder.
, Make sure that the USB device is securely
connected to the recorder (page 142).
, Check if the USB device or a cable is
damaged.
, Check if the USB device is on.
, The USB device is connected via a USB
hub. Connect the USB device directly to
the recorder.
Display language on the screen switches
automatically.
The ‘BRAVIA’ Sync features do not
operate.
, Your TV is not compatible with the
‘BRAVIA’ Sync features.
, “Control for HDMI” is set to “Off” in the
“HDMI Output” setup (page 140).
, The recorder is connected to the TV via an
amplifier. Connect the recorder directly to
the TV.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Additional Information
, When “Control for HDMI” is set to “On”
(default) in the “HDMI Output” setup
(page 140), the display language on the
screen automatically switches, according
to the language setting of the connected
TV, if you change the language settings on
your TV, etc.
149
The recorder does not operate properly.
“E02” appears in the front panel display.
, Press down [/1 on the recorder for more
than five seconds until the recorder turns
off. Then, press [/1 again to turn on the
recorder.
, When static electricity, etc., causes the
recorder to operate abnormally, turn off the
recorder and wait until the clock appears in
the front panel display. Then, unplug the
recorder and after leaving it off for a while,
plug it in again.
, The HDD information is incorrect. You
cannot make a new recording to the HDD.
Format the HDD following the instructions
of “Format HDD.” (page 124). Note that
all of the recorded contents on the HDD
will be erased. If this does not fix the
problem, contact your nearest Sony dealer.
The disc tray does not open after you
press Z (open/close).
, It may take a few seconds for the disc tray
to open after you have recorded or edited a
DVD. This is because the recorder is
adding disc data to the disc.
Any buttons do not function and
“LOCKED” appears in the front panel
display.
, The recorder is locked. Cancel the Child
Lock (page 14).
The disc tray does not open and
“TRAYLOCKED” appears in the front
panel display.
, Contact your Sony dealer or local
authorized Sony service facility.
“REPAIR” appears in the front panel
display.
, The recorder’s repair function is activated
to repair the hard disk drive or disc. Leave
the recorder on until “REPAIR” disappears
from the front panel display. Some data
may be lost even if the repair function is
activated.
“E01” appears in the front panel display.
, There is a problem in the HDD. Contact
your nearest Sony dealer. Note that
contents on the HDD may be erased when
servicing this unit.
“UPDATE” appears in the front panel
display.
, The recorder is updating the EPG and other
information.
The Parental Lock does not work.
, Check the “D.TV Age Limit” setting in the
“Parental Lock” setup (page 139).
Mechanical sounds are heard when the
recorder is off.
, While the recorder is updating the EPG
information, operational noises (such as
the internal fan) may be heard, even when
the power is off. This is not a malfunction.
, While the recorder is adjusting the clock
for the Auto Clock Set function or
updating the EPG information, operational
noises may be heard, even when the power
is off. This is not a malfunction.
Resetting the Recorder
You can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings.
1
Make sure that the recorder is turned
on and remove the disc.
2
Hold down x (stop) on the recorder
and press [/1 on the recorder.
All settings are reset and the recorder
turns off.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
150
Recordable and Playable Discs
Type
Disc Logo
Icon used
in this
manual
Hard disk VR
drive
mode
(internal)
Formatting
(new discs)
Compatibility with other
DVD players (finalising)
Select “Video
Mode Off” in
“HDD Recording
Format”
(page 137)
Dub HDD contents to a
DVD (VR mode) to play
on other DVD players
Select “Video
Mode On”
(default) in “HDD
Recording Format”
(page 137)
Dub HDD contents to a
DVD (Video mode) to
play on other DVD
players
Automatically
formatted in +VR
mode (DVD+RW
VIDEO)
Playable on DVD+RW
compatible players
(automatically finalised)
Format in VR
mode (page 38)
Playable only on VR
mode compatible players
(finalisation unnecessary)
Format in Video
mode (page 38)
Playable on most DVD
players (finalisation
necessary) (page 46)
Automatically
formatted in +VR
mode (DVD+R
VIDEO)
Playable on most DVD
players (finalisation
necessary) (page 46)
Format in VR
mode (page 38)*1
Formatting is
performed in the
“Format” setup
(page 49).
Playable only on DVD-R
in VR mode compatible
players (finalisation
necessary) (page 46)
HDD
Video
mode
DVD+RW
+RW
DVD-RW
VR
mode
Video
mode
-RWVR
-RWVideo
DVD+R
+R
DVD+R DL
DVD-R
-RVR
DVD-R
DL
Video
mode
-RVideo
Automatically
Playable on most DVD
formatted in Video players (finalisation
mode
necessary) (page 46)
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Additional Information
VR
mode
151
Usable disc versions (as of April 2008)
b Notes
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+RWs
• 6x-speed or slower DVD-RWs (Ver.1.1,
Ver.1.2 with CPRM*2)
• 16x-speed or slower DVD+Rs
• 16x-speed or slower DVD-Rs (Ver.2.0,
Ver.2.1 with CPRM*2)
• 8x-speed or slower DVD+R DL (Double
Layer) discs
• 8x-speed or slower DVD-R DL (Dual
Layer) discs (Ver.3.0 with CPRM*2)
• You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on
the same DVD-RW. To change the disc’s
format, reformat the disc (page 49). Note that the
disc’s contents will be erased after reformatting.
• You cannot shorten the time required for
recording even with high-speed discs.
• It is recommended that you use discs with “For
Video” printed on their packaging.
• You cannot add new recordings to DVD+Rs,
DVD-Rs, or DVD-RWs (Video mode) that
contain recordings made on other DVD
equipment.
• In some cases, you may not be able to add new
recordings to DVD+RWs that contain
recordings made on other DVD equipment. If
you do add a new recording, note that this
recorder will rewrite the DVD menu.
• You cannot edit recordings on DVD+RWs,
DVD-RWs (Video mode), DVD+Rs, or DVDRs that are made on other DVD equipment.
• If the disc contains PC data unrecognisable by
this recorder, the data may be erased.
• You may not be able to record, edit, or dub on
some recordable discs, depending on the disc.
• Do not insert any discs that cannot be recorded or
played on this recorder. This may cause the
recorder to malfunction.
“DVD+RW,” “DVD-RW,” “DVD+R,” “DVD+R
DL,” “DVD-R,” and “DVD-R DL” are
trademarks.
*1
When an unformatted DVD-R is inserted into
this recorder, it is automatically formatted in
Video mode. To format a new DVD-R in VR
mode, format in the “Format” setup (page 49).
*2 CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable
Media) is a coding technology that protects
copyrights for images.
Discs that cannot be recorded on
• DVD-RAMs
Maximum recordable number of titles
Disc
Number of titles
HDD*
999
DVD-RW/DVD-R
99
DVD+RW/DVD+R
49
DVD+R DL
49
DVD-R DL
99
* The maximum length for one title is 12 hours.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
152
Playable Discs
Type
Disc Logo
Icon used in
this manual
Characteristics
DVD VIDEO
DVD
Discs such as movies that can be
purchased or rented
This recorder also recognises DVDRAMs* as DVD Video compatible
discs.
VIDEO CD
VCD
VIDEO CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in
VIDEO CD/Super VIDEO CD format
CD
CD
Music CDs or CD-Rs/CD-RWs in
music CD format
DATA DVD
—
DATA DVD
DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD-RAMs*
containing MP3 audio tracks or DivX
video files
DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-ROMs
containing MP3 audio tracks, JPEG
image files or DivX video files
DATA CD
—
DATA CD
CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs
containing either MP3 audio tracks,
JPEG image files or DivX video files
“DVD VIDEO” and “CD” are trademarks.
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
DivX® is a video file compression technology,
developed by DivX, Inc.
* If the DVD-RAM has a removable cartridge,
remove the cartridge before playback.
Discs that cannot be played
Note on playback operations of DVD
VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs
Some playback operations of DVD
VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs may be intentionally
set by software producers. Since this
recorder plays DVD VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs
according to the disc contents the software
producers designed, some playback features
may not be available. Refer to the
instructions supplied with the DVD
VIDEOs/VIDEO CDs.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
Additional Information
• PHOTO CDs
• CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs that are
recorded in a format different from the
formats mentioned in the table above.
• Data part of CD-Extras
• BDs (Blu-ray Discs)
• HD DVDs
• Discs recorded with an AVCHDcompatible DVD video camera
• DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD-RWs/
DVD+Rs/DVD-Rs that do not contain
DVD Video, DivX video, JPEG image
files, or MP3 audio tracks.
• DVD Audio discs
• Cartridge-only type DVD-RAMs.
• HD layer on Super Audio CDs
• DVD VIDEOs with a different region code
(page 154).
• DVDs that were recorded on a different
recorder and not correctly finalised.
153
Region code (DVD VIDEO only)
b Notes
Your recorder has a region code printed on
the rear of the unit and will only play DVD
VIDEOs (playback only) labelled with
identical region codes. This system is used to
protect copyrights.
DVD VIDEOs labelled ALL will also play
on this recorder.
If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO,
the message “Playback prohibited by region
code.” will appear on the TV screen.
Depending on the DVD VIDEO, no region
code indication may be labelled even though
playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by
area restrictions.
• Some DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, DVD-RWs/DVDRs, DVD-RAMs, or CD-RWs/CD-Rs cannot be
played on this recorder due to the recording
quality or physical condition of the disc, or the
characteristics of the recording device and
authoring software. The disc will not play if it
has not been correctly finalised. For more
information, refer to the operating instructions
for the recording device.
• If the disc contains PC data unrecognisable by
this recorder, the data may be erased.
• Do not insert any discs that cannot be recorded or
played on this recorder. This may cause the
recorder to malfunction.
Region code
About Recording/
Dubbing Mode
Music discs encoded with copyright
protection technologies
This product is designed to play back discs
that conform to the Compact Disc (CD)
standard.
Various music discs encoded with copyright
protection technologies are being marketed
by some record companies. Please be aware
that among those discs, there are some that
do not conform to the CD standard and may
not be playable by this product.
Note on DualDiscs
A DualDisc is a two sided disc product
which mates DVD recorded material on one
side with digital audio material on the other
side.
However, since the audio material side does
not conform to the Compact Disc (CD)
standard, playback on this product is not
guaranteed.
Like the standard ×3 recording modes of
video tapes, you can select the desired
recording mode using the REC MODE
button.
Recording modes with higher quality
provide a more beautiful recording, but the
large data volume also results in a shorter
recording time.
Conversely, a longer duration provides a
longer recording time, but the lower data
volume results in a coarser picture quality.
To select further options for recording mode
(manual recording mode), set “Manual Rec.
Mode” to “On (go to setup)” in the
“Recording” setup (page 135). To record
pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on
the HDD, set “Manual Rec. Mode” to “On
(go to setup),” and then select “HQ+.” The
table on the following pages shows the
approximate recording times for the HDD
and the different DVD types in each manual
recording mode, as well as the standard
recording mode equivalents.
z Hint
To easily select a manual recording mode, press
REC MODE repeatedly to display “MN,” and
select a manual recording mode using </,.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
154
Recording time in each recording mode
Bold lines indicate noticeable level differences in recording picture quality.
Approx. recording time (hours)
Recording
mode
HQ
HDD
DVD+RW/
DVD-RW/
RDRRDRRDRRDRHXD790/ HXD890/ HXD990/ HXD1090/ DVD+R/
HXD795 HXD895 HXD995 HXD1095 DVD-R
DVD+R DL/
DVD-R DL
HQ+*1
17
23
36
73
–
–
PCM*2
25
34
53
105
1 hr. 1 min.
1 hr. 51 min.
MN32
25
34
53
105
1 hr. 1 min.
1 hr. 51 min.
MN31
27
36
57
115
1 hr. 5 min.
1 hr. 57 min.
MN30
29
39
61
120
1 hr. 10 min. 2 hr. 6 min.
MN29
31
42
66
130
1 hr. 15 min. 2 hr. 15 min.
MN28
33
45
70
140
1 hr. 20 min. 2 hr. 24 min.
MN27
36
48
75
150
1 hr. 25 min. 2 hr. 33 min.
HSP MN26
37
50
79
155
1 hr. 30 min. 2 hr. 41 min.
MN25
39
53
84
165
1 hr. 35 min. 2 hr. 50 min.
MN24
42
56
88
175
1 hr. 40 min. 2 hr. 59 min.
MN23
44
59
92
185
1 hr. 45 min. 3 hr. 8 min.
MN22
46
62
97
195
1 hr. 50 min. 3 hr. 17 min.
MN21
51
68
105
210
2
MN20
54
73
115
230
2 hr. 10 min. 3 hr. 53 min.
MN19
59
79
120
245
2 hr. 20 min. 4 hr. 11 min.
LSP MN18
63
84
130
265
2 hr. 30 min. 4 hr. 29 min.
MN17
67
90
140
280
2 hr. 40 min. 4 hr. 47 min.
SP
3 hr. 35 min.
MN16
72
96
150
300
2 hr. 50 min. 5 hr. 5 min.
ESP MN15
75
100
155
315
3
MN14
78
105
165
335
3 hr. 10 min. 5 hr. 41 min.
MN13
82
110
175
350
3 hr. 20 min. 5 hr. 59 min.
MN12
86
115
185
370
3 hr. 30 min. 6 hr. 17 min.
MN11
90
120
190
390
3 hr. 40 min. 6 hr. 35 min.
MN10
93
125
200
405
3 hr. 50 min. 6 hr. 53 min.
MN9
100
135
210
420
4
MN8
110
150
235
475
4 hr. 30 min. 8 hr. 4 min.
MN7
120
165
265
530
5
8 hr. 58 min.
MN6*3
150
200
315
635
6
10 hr. 46 min.
MN5*3
175
235
370
745
7
12 hr. 34 min.
EP
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
7 hr. 11 min.
,continued
Additional Information
LP
5 hr. 23 min.
155
Approx. recording time (hours)
HDD
Recording
mode
DVD+RW/
DVD-RW/
RDRRDRRDRRDRHXD790/ HXD890/ HXD990/ HXD1090/ DVD+R/
HXD795 HXD895 HXD995 HXD1095 DVD-R
SLP MN4*3
DVD+R DL/
DVD-R DL
200
270
425
850
8
14 hr. 21 min.
SEP MN3*3*4 255
340
530
1060
10
17 hr. 57 min.
MN2*3*4 300
405
635
1275
12
21 hr. 32 min.
MN1*3*4 340
455
710
1420
13 hr. 22 min. 24
*1
Records in higher quality (15 Mbps).
When recording to the HDD in HQ+ mode, recordings are made in “Video Mode Off” format regardless
of the “HDD Recording Format” setting (page 137).
HQ+ mode is not available for DVDs. When recording to DVDs, the recording mode automatically
switches to HQ mode even if you set to HQ+ mode.
*2 Audio signals are recorded in 48 kHz PCM format, and video signals are recorded in HQ mode. When
recording a bilingual programme, select the sound to be recorded (page 132).
*3 Titles recorded in MN6 or lower mode cannot be dubbed to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs at high speed.
*4 SEP, MN1, MN2, or MN3 mode is not available for DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVD+R DLs. When
recording to DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs, the recording mode automatically switches to SLP mode even if
you set to SEP, MN1, MN2, or MN3 mode.
Resolution
b Notes
The first figure refers to when “Input Line
System” is set to “NTSC”; the second when
set to “PAL/SECAM” in the “Basic” setup
(page 125).
• The maximum continuous recording time to the
HDD is 12 hours for a single title. A title longer
than 12 hours is divided.
• Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies
with the recording time.
– Recording a programme with poor reception,
or a programme or video source of low picture
quality.
– Recording on a disc that has already been
edited.
– Recording only a still picture or just sound.
For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is
set to “Video Mode Off”)/DVD-RW (VR
mode)/DVD-R (VR mode)
HQ+, PCM, MN32 to MN16: 720 × 480 /
720 × 576
MN15 to MN12: 544 × 480 / 544 × 576
MN11 to MN9: 480 × 480 / 544 × 576
MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576
MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288
For the HDD (“HDD Recording Format” is
set to “Video Mode On”)/DVD+RW/DVD-RW
(Video mode)/DVD+R/DVD-R (Video mode)
PCM, MN32 to MN9: 720 × 480 / 720 × 576
MN8 and MN7: 352 × 480 / 352 × 576
MN6 to MN1: 352 × 240 / 352 × 288
z Hint
Audio signals are recorded in Dolby Digital 2 ch
format (except for PCM mode).
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
156
About “High-Speed” dubbing
Required times (approximate) for “HighSpeed” dubbing from HDD to DVD (for 60minute programme)*1
Speed*2 6x
2.4x
2x
Rec.
mode
HighDVD+R
speed
(Double
DVD+RW/ Layer)
DVD-RW/
DVD+R/
DVD-R
DVD-R
(Dual
Layer)
HQ
Approx.
10 min.
Approx.
25 min.
Approx.
30 min.
HSP
Approx.
6 min.
40 sec.
Approx.
16 min.
40 sec.
Approx.
20 min.
SP
Approx.
5 min.
Approx.
12 min.
30 sec.
Approx.
15 min.
LSP
Approx.
4 min.
Approx.
10 min.
Approx.
12 min.
ESP
Approx.
3 min.
20 sec.
Approx.
8 min.
20 sec.
Approx.
10 min.
Approx.
2 min.
30 sec.
Approx.
6 min.
15 sec.
Approx.
7 min.
30 sec.
Approx.
1 min.
40 sec.*3
Approx. Approx.
60 min.*3 5 min.
SLP
Approx.
1 min.
15 sec.*3
Approx. Approx.
60 min.*3 3 min.
45 sec.
SEP
Approx.
1 min.*3
Approx. Approx.
60 min.*3 3 min.*3
LP
EP
*1
About Copy Protection
Pictures with copy protection cannot be
recorded on this recorder.
Dubbing restriction
You cannot dub movies and other DVD
VIDEOs to the HDD. Also, when dubbing
from a DVD to the HDD, scenes that contain
a copy protection signal cannot be recorded.
Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy
protection signals can be moved only from
the HDD to a DVD-RW/DVD-R (VR
mode)* (after the title is moved, the original
title in the HDD is erased). The “Move”
function is performed using Dubbing List.
Titles containing “Copy-Once” copy
protection signals are indicated with
.
Discs that can be used for protected
signals
Copy
protection
signals
Usable discs
Copy-Free (No
HDD +RW
copy protection
-RWVideo +R
signal)
-RWVR
-RVR
-RVideo
Copy-Once
HDD
-RWVR *
-RVR *
None
* CPRM-compatible DVD-RWs/DVD-Rs (VR
mode) only.
The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM
compatible equipment (page 152).
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable
Media) is a coding technology that protects
copyrights for images.
b Notes
• Protected titles in the HDD cannot be moved.
• The “Move” function is not available for HDD/
DVD DUB dubbing.
• Even if you erase a scene that contains a copy
protection signal, the recording restrictions on
that title are retained.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
Additional Information
The values in the above table are for reference
only. Actual times for dubbing also require time
for creating disc’s control information and other
data.
*2 This is the maximum recording speed of this
recorder. The recording speed cannot exceed
the value indicated in the above table even
when using discs that support higher recording
speeds. In addition, depending on the disc
condition, the recorder may be unable to record
at the maximum recording speed indicated in
the table.
*3 “High-Speed” dubbing is not available when
dubbing titles recorded in SEP, SLP, or EP
mode to DVD+RWs and DVD+Rs.
Copy-Never
157
Language Code List
For details, see page 134.
The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.
Number, Language (Code)
Country/Area Code
For details, see page 138.
Number, Area (Code)
0118, Argentina (ar)
0121, Australia (au)
0120, Austria (at)
0205, Belgium (be)
0218, Brazil (br)
0301, Canada (ca)
0312, Chile (cl)
0314, China (cn)
0411, Denmark (dk)
0609, Finland (fi)
0618, France (fr)
0405, Germany (de)
0811, Hong Kong (hk)
0914, India (in)
0904, Indonesia (id)
0920, Italy (it)
1016, Japan (jp)
1118, Korea (kr)
1325, Malaysia (my)
1324, Mexico (mx)
1412, Netherlands (nl)
1426, New Zealand (nz)
1415, Norway (no)
1611, Pakistan (pk)
1608, Philippines (ph)
1620, Portugal (pt)
1821, Russia (ru)
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
158
1907, Singapore (sg)
0519, Spain (es)
1905, Sweden (se)
0308, Switzerland (ch)
2023, Taiwan (tw)
2008, Thailand (th)
0702, United Kingdom
(gb)
2119, USA (us)
Notes about the discs
Notes About This
Recorder
• To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by
its edge. Do not touch the surface. Dust,
fingerprints, or scratches on the disc may
cause it to malfunction.
On operation
• If the recorder is brought directly from a
cold to a warm location, or is placed in a
very damp room, moisture may condense
on the lenses inside the recorder. Should
this occur, the recorder may not operate
properly. In this case, if the recorder is on,
leave it on (if it is off, leave it off) for about
an hour until the moisture evaporates.
• When you move the recorder, take out any
discs and do not apply shock or vibration to
the hard disk drive to avoid damaging the
disc or hard disk drive (page 4).
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or
heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave
it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the
temperature may rise considerably inside
the car.
• After playing, store the disc in its case.
• Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe
the disc from the centre out.
On adjusting volume
Do not turn up the volume while listening to
a section with very low level inputs or no
audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be
damaged when a peak level section is
played.
Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a
soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild
detergent solution. Do not use any type of
abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent
such as alcohol or benzine.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine,
thinner, commercially available cleaners,
or anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.
• Do not use the following discs.
– A disc that has a non-standard shape
(e.g., card, heart).
– A disc with a label or sticker on it.
– A disc that has cellophane tape or sticker
adhesive on it.
On cleaning discs, disc/lens cleaners
On replacement of parts
Do not use cleaning discs or disc/lens
cleaners (including wet or spray types).
These may cause the recorder to
malfunction.
In the event that this unit is repaired,
repaired parts may be collected for reuse or
recycling purposes.
On cleaning
About Copyright
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
Additional Information
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT OTHER
THAN CONSUMER PERSONAL USE IN
ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH
THE MPEG-2 STANDARD FOR
ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION
FOR PACKAGED MEDIA IS
EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A
LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE
PATENTS IN THE MPEG-2 PATENT
PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.,
250 STEELE STREET, SUITE 300,
DENVER, COLORADO 80206.
159
Note on MultiSession/Border discs
Notes on MP3 Audio
Tracks, JPEG Image
Files, DivX Video Files,
and i.Link
About MP3 audio tracks, JPEG
image files, and DivX video
files
MP3 is an audio compression technology
that satisfies certain ISO/MPEG regulations.
JPEG is an image compression technology.
You can play MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3)
format audio tracks on the HDD, DATA
CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) or
DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVD-RWs/
DVD-Rs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVDRAMs) or play JPEG image files on the
HDD, DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CDRWs) or DATA DVDs (DVD-ROMs/DVDRWs/DVD-Rs).
DivX® is a video file compression
technology, developed by DivX, Inc. This
product is an official DivX® Certified
product. You can play DATA CDs (CDROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) and DATA DVDs
(DVD-ROMs/DVD+RWs/DVD+Rs/DVDRWs/DVD-Rs/DVD-RAMs) that contain
DivX video files.
DATA DVDs must be recorded according to
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, Joliet, or
UDF (Universal Disk Format) 1.02, 1.50,
2.00*, or 2.01 format for the recorder to
recognise the MP3 tracks, JPEG image files,
and DivX video files.
DATA CDs must be recorded according to
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet
format for the recorder to recognise the MP3
tracks, JPEG image files, and DivX video
files.
You can also play discs recorded in
MultiSession/Border.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the
disc drives and the recording software (not
supplied) for details on the recording format.
If audio tracks and images in Music CD
format or Video CD format are recorded in
the first session/border, only the first
session/border will be played back.
MP3 audio tracks, JPEG image
files, or DivX video files that
the recorder can play
The recorder can play the following tracks
and files:
– MP3 audio tracks with the extension
“.mp3.”
– JPEG image files with the extension
“.jpeg” or “.jpg.”
– Baseline JPEG image files that conform to
the Exif 2.2* image files format, and
Y:CB:CR is 4:4:4, 4:2:2, or 4:2:0.
– DivX video files with the extension “.avi”
or “.divx.”
* “Exchangeable Image File Format”: The file
format used by digital still cameras.
z Hint
Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start
playback, it is recommended that you create
albums with no more than two trees.
b Notes
• The recorder will play any data with the
extension “.mp3,” “.jpeg,” “.jpg,” “.avi,” or
“.divx” even if they are not in MP3, JPEG, or
DivX format. Playing these data may generate a
loud noise which could damage your speaker
system.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may not
be possible. For example, the picture may be
unclear, playback may not appear smooth, the
sound may skip, and so on.
• Depending on the disc, playback may take some
time to start.
• Some files cannot be played.
• For MP3 audio tracks and DivX video files, the
recorder can play up to 99 albums each on a
DATA CD or DATA DVD. Up to 99 tracks and
files under an album can be played.
• For JPEG image files, the recorder can load up to
99 albums and/or up to 999 files under an album
on a DATA CD/DATA DVD or the connected
USB device at a time. To view unloaded albums,
reload them.
* Not available for MP3 audio tracks.
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
160
• Proceeding to the next or another album may
take some time.
• The image size that can be displayed is limited.
The following image sizes can be displayed:
width 160–5,120 pixels by height 120–3,840
pixels.
• This recorder supports MP3 audio tracks
recorded with a sampling frequency of 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.
• No more than a 1 GB MP3 audio track can be
played.
• The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in
mp3PRO format.
• The recorder cannot play a DivX video file of a
size larger than 720 (width) × 576 (height)/4 GB.
• The recorder may not play a DivX video file
when the file has been combined from two or
more DivX video files.
Notes on copying JPEG image files/MP3
audio tracks
• You cannot copy JPEG image files/MP3 audio
tracks to the HDD if:
– The total number of JPEG image albums on
the HDD exceeds 999.
– The total number of JPEG image files/MP3
audio tracks under an album exceeds 999.
– The MP3 audio tracks are 1 GB or larger.
• Note that the size of JPEG image files copied to
the HDD may be automatically increased to fit
the TV screen.
• You cannot copy JPEG image files onto a DATA
DVD finalised on other recorders or devices.
• If a warning message indicating that the HDD is
full appears, erase several albums or files to
make space. For details on erasing tracks or files,
see page 107 or 117.
About i.LINK
The DV IN jack on this recorder is i.LINKcompliant for digital video cameras.
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE
1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY,
and is a trademark approved by many
corporations.
IEEE 1394 is an international standard
standardized by the Institute of Electrical
and Electronics Engineers.
For details on how to dub when this recorder
is connected to other video equipment
having DV jacks, see page 98.
The DV IN jack on this recorder can only
input DVC-SD signals. It cannot output
signals. The DV IN jack will not accept
MICRO MV signals from equipment such as
a MICRO MV digital video camera with an
i.LINK jack.
For further precautions, see the notes on
page 98.
For details on precautions when connecting
this recorder, also refer to the instruction
manuals for the equipment to be connected.
b Note
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be
connected to this recorder by the i.LINK cable
(DV connecting cable). When connecting this
recorder to i.LINK-compatible equipment having
two or more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the
instruction manual of the equipment to be
connected.
i.LINK and
are trademarks.
Additional Information
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
161
Specifications
System
Laser: Semiconductor laser
Transmission standards (Digital
broadcasting): DVB-T
Channel coverage (Digital
broadcasting):
VHF: 170 MHz to 230 MHz
UHF: 470 MHz to 862 MHz
Channel coverage (Analogue
broadcasting):
PAL (B/G, D/K, I)/SECAM (L)
VHF: E2 to E12, R1 to R12, F2 to
F10, Italian A to H, Ireland A to J,
South Africa 4 to 11, 13
UHF: E21 to E69, R21 to R69, B21 to
B69, F21 to F69
CATV: S01 to S05, S1 to S20, France
B to Q
HYPER: S21 to S41
The above channel coverage merely ensures
the channel reception within these ranges. It
does not guarantee the ability to receive
signals in all circumstances. The channels
that can be received differ depending on the
country/region.
Video reception: Frequency
synthesizer system
Audio reception: Split carrier system
Aerial out: 75-ohm asymmetrical aerial
socket
Timer: Clock: Quartz locked/Timer
indication: 24-hour cycle (digital)
Video recording format: MPEG-2,
MPEG-1
Audio recording format/applicable
bit rate: Dolby Digital 2 ch
256 kbps/128 kbps (in EP, SLP, and
SEP mode), PCM
Inputs and outputs
LINE 2 OUT
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/10 kilohms
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)
LINE 2 IN
(AUDIO): Phono jack/2 Vrms/more than
22 kilohms
(VIDEO): Phono jack/1.0 Vp-p
(S VIDEO): 4-pin mini DIN/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
C: 0.3 Vp-p (PAL)
LINE 3 – TV: 21-pin
CVBS OUT
S-Video/RGB OUT (upstream)
LINE 1/DECODER: 21-pin
CVBS IN/OUT
S-Video/RGB IN
Decoder
DV IN: 4-pin/i.LINK S100
DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL): Phono
jack/0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
(Y, PB/CB, PR/CR):
Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p,
PB/CB: 0.7 Vp-p, PR/CR: 0.7 Vp-p
G-LINK: mini jack
HDMI OUT: HDMI™ Connector
USB:
USB jack Type A (For connecting
digital still camera, Memory card
reader, USB memory and HDD
camcorder)
USB jack Type B (For connecting
PictBridge-compatible printers)
Conditional access module (RDRHXD795/HXD895/HXD995/
HXD1095 only): CAM (Conditional
Access Module) slot
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
162
General
Power requirements: 220-240 V AC,
50/60 Hz
Power consumption:
RDR-HXD790/HXD890/HXD990/
HXD1090: 47 W
RDR-HXD795/HXD895/HXD995/
HXD1095: 49 W
Dimensions (approx.):
430 × 76.5 × 288 mm (width/height/
depth) incl. projecting parts
Hard disk drive capacity:
RDR-HXD790/HXD795: 120 GB
RDR-HXD890/HXD895: 160 GB
RDR-HXD990/HXD995: 250 GB
RDR-HXD1090/HXD1095: 500 GB
Mass (approx.): 4.7 kg
Operating temperature: 5ºC to 35ºC
Operating humidity: 25% to 80%
Supplied accessories:
Mains lead (1)
Aerial cable (1)*
Remote commander (remote) (1)
Set top box controller (1)
R6 (size AA) batteries (2)
* Two aerial cables are supplied for some models.
Specifications and design are subject to
change without notice.
Additional Information
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
163
Index
Words in quotations appear
in the on-screen displays.
Numerics
“96 kHz PCM Output”
133
A
“A.TV Auto Channel
Setting” 30
“A-B Erase” 84
“A-B Repeat” 77
“Add New Channels” 126
“Add to Play List” 105
Adjusting
playback picture 120
recording picture 120
Aerial 18
“Aerial Power” 30, 127
“AFT” 129
“Album Name” 107
“Alternate Search” 56
“Analog Tuner” 127
“Analog Tuner Level”
132
ANGLE 75, 114
“Angle Indicator” 75, 138
“Artist Name” 107
AUDIO 75
Audio cord 25
“Audio DRC” 134
“Audio In” 132
Audio input 26
“Audio Language” 134
“Audio Out” 133
“Auto” 124
“Auto Channel Setting”
127
“Auto Chapter (DVD+R/
+RW)” 136
“Auto Chapter (HDD/
VR)” 136
“Auto Chapter (Video)”
136
Auto Clock Set 31, 124
“Auto Language” 134
“Auto Scan” 127
“Auto Skip” 126
B
“Basic” 123, 124
Batteries 27
“Bilingual Recording”
132
Bilingual recording 70
‘BRAVIA’ Sync 24
C
CAM 26
Canal Plus 36
“Cancel Protection” 117
CD 153
“CH System” 128
“Change Genre” 83
“Change Password” 138
“Channel” 128
“Channel Options” 126
“Channel Sort” 126
“Channel Swapping” 130
Chapter 43, 58, 70
“Chapter Edit” 85
Chapter number 43
“Chapter Search” 80
“Chase Play” 79
Checking/changing/
cancelling timer settings
59, 71
Child Lock 14
“CI Information” 142
“Clock Setting” 31, 124
“Combine” 86, 87
“Command Mode” 29,
141
COMPONENT VIDEO
OUT 23
“Component Video Out”
130
Conditional Access
Module 26
“Confirm Printer” 142
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
164
Connecting
a printer 118
the aerial cable 18
the audio cords 25
the HDMI cord 22,
25
the set top box
controller 18
the USB device 102,
108
the video cords 22
Controlling TVs with the
remote 28
“Copy” 110
“Copy Album” 103
“Copy Album Contents”
110
“Copy all to HDD” 108
“Copy Photos from a
Digital Camera” 109
Copy protection signals
157
“Copy to DVD” 110, 111
“Copy to HDD” 108
“Copy Track” 103
Copy-Free 157
Copying
albums 102
audio tracks 102
JPEG image files 108
Copy-Never 157
Copy-Once 157
Country/Area code 158
CPRM 152
“Create x-Pict Story” 115
Creating a Playlist 87
D
“D.TV Age Limit” 139
“D.TV Auto Channel
Setting” 30
“D.TV Language” 127
DATA CD 153
DATA DVD 153
“Decoder” 37, 130
DIGITAL OUT
(COAXIAL) 25
Digital Services
Digital Text viewing
52
EPG 50
Programme
information 51
“Digital Tuner” 126
Disc settings 45, 46, 49,
123
“Disc Setup” 45, 46, 49,
123
Disc space 82
Disc types 151, 153
“Divide” 84, 86, 87
DivX
“Registration Code”
141
DivX video files 73
Dolby Digital 25, 133
“Download from TV” 127
DTS 25, 133
Dubbing
Dubbing List 90
HDD/DVD DUB 90
“High-Speed” 157
Move 157
DV camcorder 98
DV camcorder dubbing 98
“DV Manual
Dubbing” 100
“DV One-Touch
Dubbing” 100
“DV Playback” 101
DV IN 98
“DV Input” 99, 132
“DV Manual Dubbing”
100
“DV One-Touch
Dubbing” 100
“DV Playback” 101
“DVD Backup” 93
“DVD Menu Language”
135
“DVD Playback” 138
G
DVD VIDEO 153
DVD+R 151
DVD+RW 151
DVD-R 151
DVD-RAM 153
DVD-RW 151
“Genre Name” 83
“Grid” 62
GUIDE 61, 66
GUIDE Plus+ system 61,
66
E
H
Easy Setup 30, 125
“Edit” 83, 107
Editing 82
chapters 85
Playlist 87
titles 83
“Editor” 62
Enter characters 44
EPG
Viewing a list of
available
channels 50
“EPG Type Select” 31,
125
“Erase” 59, 83, 86, 107,
117
“Erase Album” 117
“External Audio” 132
F
“Finalise” 46
Finalising 46
“Format” 49
“Format DVD-RW” 123
“Format HDD.” 124
Formatting 49
“Frame Accurate Editing”
82
Freeze Frame 76
Front panel 14
“Front Panel Display” 141
Front panel display 15
“Full Dubbing” 96
Handling discs 159
HDD camcorder 94
HDD camcorder dubbing
94
“Full Dubbing” 96
“HDD-Cam
Dubbing” 96
One-Touch Dubbing
96
“HDD Recording Format”
137
“HDD-Cam Dubbing” 96
HDMI
“4:3 Video Output”
140
“Audio Output” 140
“Colour” 140
“Control for HDMI”
140
“Screen Resolution”
139
HDMI cord 22, 25
HDMI OUT 23, 25
“HDMI Output” 139
“HELP Setting” 125
I
i.LINK 161
“Info” 62
INPUT 60
“Input Colour System”
130
“Input Line System” 125
J
Jukebox 102
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
,continued
165
L
Labelling 45
“Language” 134
“LINE 1 In” 131
LINE 1/DECODER 34
LINE 2 IN 35
“LINE 3 Out” 131
M
Main sound 70, 132
Mains lead 27
Making a backup disc 93
Managing
audio tracks on the
Music Jukebox
107
JPEG image files 117
“Manual” 124
“Manual CH Setting” 128
Manual Clock Set 31, 124
“Manual Rec. Mode” 135
Manual recording mode
135
MENU 73
Menu
DVD’s Menu 73
Top menu 73
“Modify” 59
“Move” 87, 88
MP3 audio tracks 73
MPEG 25, 133
“Multi-Mode” 83, 117
“Music Jukebox” 102
“My TV” 62
N
“Name” 130
“New Album” 117
NICAM 70
“NICAM Select” 132
“NTSC on PAL TV” 131
Number buttons 80
O
“On Screen Display” 141
ONE-TOUCH DUB 96,
100
One-Touch Play 24, 74
“Optimise HDD” 124
“Options” 141
“Options 2” 142
“Original” 41, 82, 104
“OSD Language” 134
P
Page mode 41, 104, 113
“Parental Lock” 74, 138
Parts and controls 12
Pause Live TV 79
“Pause Mode” 138
PAY-TV 36
PBC 73
PDC 57, 69
“Photo Album” 108, 112
“Picture Adjustment” 120
Picture quality 120
“Play List Name” 107
PLAY MODE 77, 78
Play mode
“A-B Repeat” 77
“Programme” 78,
106
“Repeat” 77
Playable discs 151, 153
“Playback” 137
Playback 73, 104, 112,
151, 153
“A-B Repeat” 77
DivX video files 73
DV camcorder 101
fast forward 76, 105
fast reverse 76, 105
freeze frame 76
instant advance 75
instant replay 75
JPEG image files 112
Jukebox 104
MP3 audio tracks 73
“Programme” 78,
106
“Repeat” 77, 105
resume play 74
rotate 114
scan audio 76
slow-motion play 76
zoom 114
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
166
Playlist 41, 82, 104
“Power Save” 125
Printing JPEG image files
118
“Programme” 78, 106
Programme information
51
“Progressive” 31
“Protect” 83, 117
“Protect Album Contents”
117
“Protect Disc” 45
Protection
album 117
disc 45
JPEG image file 117
title 83
Q
Quick Timer 58, 69
R
Rear panel 16
REC 38
REC MODE 154
REC STOP 38, 96, 100
“Rec. Mode Adjust” 54,
68, 135
“Recommendation
Search” 56
Recordable discs 151
“Recording” 135
Recording 53, 66
picture adjustment
120
recording format 151
recording mode 40,
154
recording time 40,
154
Series Recording 55
while watching
another
programme 39
Recording mode 40, 154
Recording time 40, 154
Recovery Recording 57,
71
Region code 154
Remaining time 43
Remote 12, 27
“Rename Album” 117
“Rename File” 117
“Repeat” 77, 105
“Repeat Album” 77, 105
“Repeat Artist” 105
“Repeat Chapter” 77
“Repeat Disc” 77
“Repeat Play List” 105
“Repeat Programme” 77,
105
“Repeat Title” 77
“Repeat Track” 77, 105
“Replace Channels” 126
Resetting the recorder
125, 150
“Restart USB Device”
142
Resume Play 74
Rotate 114
Setting up the GUIDE
Plus+ system 32
“Setup” 62
“Signal Check” 127
Simultaneous Rec and
Play 80
“Skip” 128
“Skip Once” 59
Slideshow 114
x-Pict Story 115
Slow-motion play 76
SMARTLINK 24, 141
“Software Update” 142
“Sort Titles” 41
“Sound System” 130
Split Programmes 55
Sub sound 70, 132
SUBTITLE 75
“Subtitle Display” 135
“Subtitle Language” 134
“Subtitle Recording” 135
Super VIDEO CD 153
S
T
S VIDEO 23
Thumbnail picture 42
Scan Audio 76
preview mode 42,
“Schedule” 62
142
“Seamless Playback” 138
“Time Search” 80
“Search” 62
TIMER 56
Searching
Timer List 59
audio track 105
Timer recording
by genre 42
check/change/cancel
fast reverse/fast
59, 71
forward 76, 105
EPG timer setting 53
JPEG image file 114
GUIDE Plus+ system
locating the
66
beginning of the
manual setting 56,
68
title/chapter/
“Rec. Mode Adjust”
track 75, 105
54, 68
scan audio 76
“Series Recording” 55
“Timing” 71
“Series Search” 56
Title 43
“Set Genre” 83
Title List 40
“Set Password” 138
“Genre” 42
“Set Preview” 142
“Sort Titles” 41
“Set Thumbnail” 83, 136
thumbnail 42
Set top box controller 18,
“Title Name” 83
Title number 43
33
Set top box receiver 20
“Title Search” 80
Downloaded From DvDPlayer-Manual.com Sherwood Manuals
TOP MENU 73
“Track Name” 107
“Track Search” 80
Troubleshooting 143
TV Direct Rec. 24, 39
TV PAUSE 79
“TV Pause” 79, 142
TV system 130
TV t 28, 39
“TV Type” 31, 137
TV/DVD 29, 39
U
“Undo” 83
“Unfinalise” 48
Unfinalising 48
“Unprotected” 83
Usable discs 151, 153
USB 95
Using the setup menus
123
V
VIDEO CD 153
Video cord 22
“Video In/Out” 130
Video input 23
Video mode 151
“Video Mode Compatible
Editing” 82
VPS 57, 69
VR mode 151
X
x-Pict Story 115
“Play List” 116
“Theme” 116
Z
Zoom 114
ZWEITON 70
167
Sony Corporation
Printed in Hungary Sherwood Manuals
Downloaded
From DvDPlayer-Manual.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement